Lectures on Polyhedral Topology; by John R. Stallings
Notes by G. Ananda Swarup
No part of this book may be reproduced in any form by print,, microfilm or any other means without written permission from the Tata Institute of Fundamental - Research, Colaba, Bombay 5
Tata Institute-of " Fundamental·..Research,^ Bombay 1967
TABLE OF CONTENTS Page
Chapter I
Chapter II
Introduction.
1
: Polyhedra
4
1.1. Definition of polyhedra
4
1.2. Convexity
5
1.3. Open convex sets
12
1.4. The calculus of boundaries
16
ΐ.5. Convex cells
22
1.6. Presentations of polyhedra
27
1.7· Refinement by bisection
30
: Triangulation.
35
2.1. Triangulation of polyhedra
35
2.2. Triangulation of maps
37
Chapter III : Topology and approximation.
Chapter IV
43
3.1. Neighbourhoods that retract
44
3.2. Approximation theorem
46
3.3. Mazur's criterion
51
: Link and star technique.
54
1. Abstract theory I
54
4.2. Abstract theory II
5δ
4.3. Geometric theory
61
4.4. Polyhedral cells, spheres and Manifolds
72
4. 5- Recalling homotopy- facts
79
Page Chapter V
: General position.
...
5. 1. Nondegeneracy
82
.
83
5.2. Ν D (n)-spaces. Definition and elementary properties 5.3. Characterisations of
· D (n)-spaces
...
5-4. Singularity dimension Chapter VI
86 89 98
: Regular neighbourhoods.
115
6.1., Isotopy
...
1l6
6.2. Centerings, isotopies,, neighbourhoods of subpolyhedra 6.3. Definition of 'Regular Neighbourhoods.
124
6.4. Collaring .. 6.-5· Absolute regular neighbourhoods
12?
and Newnanish theorem 6.6.
...
136
Collapsing
141
6.7. Homogeneous collapsing
...
...
...
145
6.8. Regular neighbourhood theorem
149
6.9. Some applications and remarks
I6I
6.10. Conclusion Chapter VII
118
. ''
...
165
: Regular collapsing.
I68
7.1. Regular collapsing
168
7.2. Applications to unknotting...
179
Appendix to Chapter VII ,
184
Chapter VIII : Handles and s-cobordism 8.1. Handles
...
191 191
Ill Page 3.2. Relative manifolds and their handle presentations 8.3.
193
Statement of the theorems, applications, comments
198
δ.4. Modification of handle presentations ... β. 5. Cancellation of handles
210 215
8.6. Insertion of cancelling: pairs of handles.
222
8.7. Elimination of 0 - and 1-handles
231
...
8.8. Dualisation
235
8.9. iilgebraic description
238
8.10. Proofs of the main theorems
246
8.11. Proof of the isotopy lemma
...
...
253
Introduction
The recent, efflorescense in the theory of polyhedral manifolds due to Smale's handle-theory, the differential obstruction theory of Munkres and Hirsch, the engulfing theorems, and the vrork of Zeeman, Bing and their students - all this has led to a vride gap between the modern theory and the old foundations typified by Reidemeister's Topologie der Polyeder and Whitehead's "Simplicial spaces, nuclei, and nir-groups". This gap has been filled somewhat by various sets of notes, notably Zeeman's at I^H.E.S.; another interesting exposition is Glaser's at Rice University, Well, here is my contribution to bridging the gap. These notes contains (1) The elementary theory of finite polyhedra in real vector spaces. The intention, not always executed, was to emphasize geometry, avoiding combinatorial theory where possible. Combinatorially, convex cells and bisections are preferred to simplexes and stellar or derived subdivisions.
Still, some simplicial technique
must be slogged through. (2) A theory of "general position" (i.e., approximation of maps by ones whose singularities have specifically bounded dimensions), based on "non-degeneracy".
The concept of n-manifold
is generalized in the most natural way for general-position theory by that of ND(n)-space - polyhedron Μ such that every map from an n-dimensional polyhedron into Μ
can be approximated by a
non-degenerate map (one whose point-inverse are a?.! finite). (3) A- theory of "regular neighbourhoods" in arbitrary polyhedra. Our regular neighbourhoods are all isotopic and equivalent to the star in a. second-derived subdivision (this is more or less the definition). Many applications are derived right after the elementary lemma that "locally collared implies collared". We then characterize regular neighbourhoods in terms of Whitehead's "collapsing", suitably modified for this presentation.
The advantage of talking about
regular neighbourhoods in arbitrary polyhedra becomes clear when we see exactly how they shoiild behave at the boundaries of manifolds. After a little about isotopy (especially the "cellular moves" of Zeeman), our description of the fundamental ^echniques in j'f^ polyhedral topology is over. Perhaps the most basic topic omitted is the theory of block-bundles, microbundles and transversality, (/).) Finally, we apply our methods to the theory of handle-presentations of PL-manifolds a la Smalls theory for differential manifolds.
This we describe sketchily; it is quite
analogous to the differential case. There is one innovation. In order to get two handles which homotopically cancel to geometrically cancel, the "classical" way is to interpret the hypothesis in terms of the intersection number of attaching and transverse spheres, to reinterpret this geometrically, and then to embed a two-cell over which a sort of Whitney move can be made to eliminate a pair of intersection.
Our method, although rather ad-hoc, is more direct,
avoiding the algebraic -complication of intersection numbers
(especially unpleasant in the non-simply-connected case) as well as any worry that the two-cell might causej of course^ it amounts to the same thing really. This method is inspired by the engulfing theorem. ./"There are, by the way, at least two ways to use the engulfing theorem itself to prove this point_7. We do not describe many applications of handle-theory; we do obtain Zeeman's codimension 3 unknotting theorem as a consequence. This way of proving it is, unfortmately, more mundane than "sunny collapsing". We omit entirely the engulfing theorems and their diverse applications. We have also left out all direct contact with differential topology. •«•
*
*
Let me add a public word of thanks to the Tata Institute of Fundamental Research for giving me the opportunity to work on these lectures for three months that were luxuriously free of the worried, anxious students and administrative annoyances that are so enervating elsewhere. And many thanks to Shri Ananda Swarup for the essential task of helping write these notes.
John R. Stallings
Bombay March, 1967
Chapter I Polyhedra 1.1. Definition of Polyhedra. Basic units out of which polyhedra can be constructed are convex hulls of finite sets. A polyhedron (enclidean polyhedron) is a subset of some finite dimensional real vector space which is the union of finitely many such units,
("Infinite polyhedra" which are
of interest in some topological situations will be discussed much later). A polyhedral map f ; Ρ — ^ whose graph is a polyhedron.
Q is a function f s Ρ
^Q
That is, suppose Ρ . and Q are subsets
of vector spaces V and W respectively; the graph of f, denoted by PCf),
is the set T C f ) = '^(x, y) I XC:P , y = f(x) t:Q ^
which is contained in V structure,
W, which has an evident vector space
"HCf) is a polyhedron, if and only if (by definition),
f is a polyhedral map. Constant functions, as well as identity • function Ρ - — ^ Ρ are polyhedral maps. The question whether the composition of polyhedral maps is polyhedral leads directly to the question whether the intersection of two polyhedra is a polyhedron. The answer is "Yes" in both cases. This could be proved directly, but we shall use a round about method which introduces useful techniques. /
It will be seen that polyhedra and polyhedral maps form a category. We are interested in 'equivalences' in this category,
that is maps f : Ρ
^ Q, which are polyhedral, one-to-one and onto.
When do such equivalences exist? How can they be classified? Etc... A finite dimensional real vector space V has a unique interesting topology, which can be described by any Euclidean metric on it. Polytiedra inherit a relative topology which make them compact metric spaces.
Since polyhedral maps have compact graphs they are
•epntinuous,. This· provides us with an interesting relaticHiship between polyhedra and topology.. We may discuss topological matters about polyhedra - homology, homotopy, hOTieomorphy,-: and .ask whether these influence the polyhedral categaiy and its equivalences*; • After this brief discussion of the scope of the subject^, we proceed to the, development of the technique. 1.2. Convexity. TIM IIFC ITJJII J
,.11,1 ,-; 1,1
(H, denotes the field of real numbers, and- V a finite dimenaional vector space over let a, b 6 V. "The line segment· betwem. a and b is. denoted by [[a, bj . It is defined thus: [a, b3 = ^t a + (l -.t) A set C (^V is called convex if
Ϊ whenever
a, b 6 C» ' Clearly V· itself -is convex, and.-the intersection of any family .of convex sets, is again convex. Therefore every set Σζ^ν is contained in a smallest -convex set --namely-the,intersexrtion of ali.,.convex. sets containing X;"" this .ia_called the convex hull of X, and is denoted by
t.2. 1. Definition.". A convex combination of a subset X of V is a point of V which can be represented by a finite linear combination k i^O where x^t 1, r^ e !R, r^^^ 0 for all i , and 1.2.2. Proposition.
The convex hull
k ^^ r. = 1. i =0 ^
K{1) of X is equal to the
set of convex combinations of X. Proof; Call the latter
Λ(Χ).
is convex and. contains X, hence If X
It will be shown first that· K(X) C λ(Χ).
X, then
1 • χ is a convex combination of X, k I · ' Let Ρ = J " r. x. , (j- = s. y. — 1 X ^ J J i = 0 j= 0
hence X
be two points of /\(X), A typical £oint of t f + (1-t) 5"= ^
(t r^) Xi +
= t + ( l-t) =1,
is of the form
((1-t) s^) y^, where 04t41.
k ^ ^i ^ ΣΙ ' ΣΙ i-O'
Λ(Χ)
= (k H ^i^ ^
j= o
i= 0
^i Σ. j= 0
and all the coefficients are ^ 0, t -P + (l-t) <5~
is a convex combination of X. Hence 7\(X) is convex. To show that Λ(Χ)ζ_ K.(X) it must be shown that any convex set C containing X
contains Λ (X), Let
P= r X + ... + r X , (x 11 η η 1 combination of
T"
i
=0
be a typical convex
x^ ,..., x^, . By induction on η it will be shovm
that any convex set C containing X
contains
also. If η = 1,
^ Xj e x C C· li" η > 1, then
That is ρ is on the line segmeht between x^ lind r Xo + .; - + JL X2 + +
•
'
iiiductionj the sedond point beldngs to
1 Gj hence ^ t G. Thus 7\{1)Q C. Therefore
arid
Λ(Χ)=ί((Χ).α 1. 2>5· Definition. A finite subset ^x^, ''' ^ \
^^
^^
to be independent (orfiffinelyIndependent), if, for real numbers TQ ,..., v^, the equations ^ ···· ^ ^k \ = ° r^ + 0 ^
+ r =0, k
imply that " · · · = ^k
0.
Ex., 1.2.4. The subset ^x^ ^...., x^ ^ of V is independent if and only if the subset
0
of V
IR. is linearly
independent. Q Ex. 1.2.5. The subset ^x^ only if the subset ^x^
x^
x^
of V is independent if and
»*, x^ - x^
of V is linearly
independent. Q Hence if ^x^ ,..·., x^^ C ^^ x
»· * > is independent if and only if ^ + x^ ,..., χ + x^^ is independents These two exercises show that the maxunum number of independent points in V is (dim V + 1)»
8
The convex hull of an independent set ij^x^ is called a closed k-simplex with vertices denoted by jc^
x^^
x^^ x^^ and is
The number k is called the ''imension
of the simplex. The empty set 0 is independent, its convex hull, also empty, is the unique (-1)-dimensional simplex. A set of only one point is independent; li_x3 =
is a 0-dimensional simplex. A
set of two distinct points is independent; the closed simplex with vertices
y^ coincides with the line segment [x, y^) between
X and y. 1.2.6. Proposition.
If ^^^
, ^Jr^Cj, then ^x^ ,..·.,
independent if and only if every point of K ^ Q
is ^
unique convex combination of \x χ 7 . L0 η5 Proof; Let ^ ^ x ^ b e independent. If
f^A · · · ^ ^ = s X +....+ s X , with 5" r. = 1 = Τ s., ' 0 0 n n O O n n /L χ ^ χ' then (r - s ) χ + ... + (r - s ) χ =0, and . '' υ U 0 η η η (tq - Sq) + .. + (r^^ - s^) = 0. Hence and the expression for
(r^^ - s^) = 0 for all i ,
is unique.
If ^XQ ,..., x^^ is not independent, then there are real numbers r^ , not all zero· such that r„ x^ + ,-..+ r X = 0 and 0 0 η η r_ + . + r = 0. O n Choose the ordering ^ ^ x^^^ so that there is a it for which
Γ,^Ο 0
if i < 1 if i ^ I,.
Since not all r.^ are zero, r^ +
^ = (-^i)
···
^
Let this number be r. Then 12 X, •y> 0
... V.
-rs X t + .... + -r. ηX
X, t-1
But these, are two distinct convex combinations of ^x^ which represent the same point, a contradiction. 1.2.7. Proposition. The convex hull
^
Κ(X) of X is equal to the
union of all simplexes with vertices belonging to X. Proof} By 1.2.2.,, it is enough to show that a convex combination of • V X belongs to a simplex with vertices in X. Let 'P = r^ x^ + of
+ r^ x^ ; x^ C X,. '51 ^^ =
j
^ Qj
point
(X). It will be shown by induction on η that^belongs to
a simplex with vertices in the set ^x^
, If η = i.,
then ρ = x^ £ jx^ . So let η > 1. If ^x^ >«·.·> Xj^^ is independent, there is nothing to prove. If not, there are s^ s^, not all zero, such that s. X. + . . , + s X = 0 and s + 11 η η 1 i>. define
+ s =0. η
When s. = 0, i '
_ qq,. ^j^^gj^ ^^ ^an be supposed that x,
arranged such that li s..,
^ ...
Then s^ y 0. Hence x^ = ~
^n η
^s^ x^ + ... + s 'n-1
x„
is
10
Therefore
+
+ (r - s ^n) χ •t · η-1 η-1 —η' nSince for all i < n,
- ... Sn
this expresses Ρ as a convex combination of L1 n-1 i Ρ is contained in a simplex vdth vertices
By inductive hypothesis, in l^x^
α The following propositions about independent sets vd.ll be
useful later (See L. S. Pontryagin "Foundations of combinatorial Topology", Graylock Press, Rochester, N.Y., pages 1 - 9 for complete proofs). Let dim V = m, and
be a euclidean metric on V.
First, proposition 1.2.4 can be reformulated as follows: Ex. 1.2,8. Let
be a basis for V, and jx^ )*")
a subset of V. Let x. = =1 a e + ,.. + a. e ; 0 4 i 4 n. Then 1 1 1 1 m' the subset jx^ >·'•> ^^ independent if and only if the matrix ^
a
1
a
0 1
•
1 has rank (n + l)·
·
2
0
0 2
. a.m
«
a η
1
a η
2
m η
D
1.2.9. Proposition, Let ^x^
X V be a subset of V, η 4, m. n3
11
Given any (η + 1) real numbers
(c^ > 0, 0 ^ i
y^eV, such that ό (x^ , y^)
3 points
and the set ^yQ
y^'^ is
independent. Sketch of the proof; Choose a set ^UQ
u^^ of (n + l)
independent points and consider the sets Z(t) = t u^ + (l-t) x^^ , 0 ^ t 41,
u^ + (l-t) x^
Let N(Z (t)) denote the matrix
corresponding to the set Z(t) as given in 1.2.8. (the points being taken in the particular order).
Z( 1) =
>··· ^^^ ' hence some
matrix of (n + l)-colurams of N(Z(l)) has nonzero determinant. Let D(t) denote the determinant of the corresponding matrix in N(Z(t)), D(t) is a poljmomial in t, and does not vanish identically. Hence there are numbers as near 0 as we like such that D(s) does not vanish.
This means that N(Z(s)) is independent, and if s in
near 0, Z(s)^ will be near x^. Q Hence in anyarbitrary neighbourhood of a point of V, there are (m + 1) independent points. The above proof is reproduced from Pontryagm's book. The next propositions are also proved by eonsidering suitable determinants (see the book of Pontryagin mentioned .above). Ex.
1.2.to. If the subset
then there exists a number of V with
x^ ^ of
V is independent,
^ 0, such that any subset ^y^ ,..., y^^
h (x^, y^) < Τλ for all i, is again independent,
1.2.11. Definition.
A subset X = ^XQ )··">
of 'V is said
to be in general position, if every subset of X containing points is independent (where m = dim V).
m + 1
12
Ex. 1,2.12. Given any subset X = ^x^^ ,..., x^ ^ of V and (n + 1 )-numbers with
0 4,1 ^ n, there exists points y^, O ^ i ^ n
,7 ^ ) a n d
such that the subset Y = ^Q, ..., ^n
V is in general position. Hint; Use 1.2.9, 1.2.10 and induction,
Q
1.3· Openconvex sets. 1.3.1. Definition. A subset A of V is said to be an open convex set if 1) A is convex 2) for every x, y ζ A, there exists £·> 0, such that -ζχ + (1 +€)y6A.
(e= 6(x,y) depending
on X, y).
In otherwords the line segment joining χ and y can be prolonged a little in A. Clearly the empty set and any set consisting of one point are open convex sets. So open convex sets in V need not necessarily be open in the topology of V. Clearly the intersection of finitely many open convex sets is again an open convex set. 1.3.2>
Definition. Let ^x^ >·.·>
13
An open convex combination of ^^ > · ·. > x^^^ is a convex combination r^ X| + ..i + Tj^ Xj^ such that every coefficient
^ 0. The set
of all points represented by such open convex combinations is denoted by 0(x^
x^). It is easily seen that 0(x
χ ) is an open convex η
1 set. 1.3.3. Definition. If ^x^ j.-..^ 0(x^
is independent, then
x^) is called an open k-simplex with vertices Jj^x^
The number k is called'the dimension of the simplex 0(xq
x^^, Xy^).
If ^ig >'·'·> ^^ C ^ J · · · J η ^ , then the open simplex ) is called a s-face (or a face) of 0(xq
x^).
If s < k, then, it is called a proper face. Clearly, the closed simplex x^ > · · · > xj^ i® '^'be disjoint union of 0(XQ
x^^) and all its proper faces.
We give another class of examples of open cpnvex sets below which will be used to construct other types of open convex sets. 1.3.4. Definition.
A linear manifold in V is a subset Μ of V
such that whenever x, y ζ;· Μ
and r
then r χ + (l-r) y 6 M.
Linear manifolds in V are precisely the translates of subspaces of V; that is, if V' is a subspace of V, and Ζ 6 V, then the set ζ + V' =(z + z' z'
is a linear manifold in V,'
and every linear manifold in V is of this form. Moreover, given a linear manifold Μ the subspace Vjyj· of V of which Μ is a translate in imique, namely f
ΊΑ
- y ζ ζ.Μ,
- ζ' ζ eM, ζ' a fixed element of M | .
Thus the dimension of a linear manifold can be easily defined, and is equal to one less than the cardinality of any maximal independent subset of Μ (see 1.2.5·). A linear manifold of dimension 1, we vdll call a line. If L is a line, a, b
L, a
b, then every other
point on L is of the form t a + (l-t)b,
If Μ is a linear
manifold in V and dim Μ - (dim 7-1), then we call Μ a hyperplane in V. 1,3.5. Definition. Let V and W be real vector spaces. A function (D : V — ^ W is said to be a linear map, if for every t €{K,and every x, y ^ V, (p(t X + (l-t)y) = t (p(x) + (1-t) φ(y). Alternatively, one can characterize a linear map as being the sum of a vector space homomorphism and a constant. Ex. 1.3.6. In definition 1.3.5, it is enough to assume the 9(t X + (-l-t)y) = t φ(χ) + (1-t) Cp(y) for 0 ^ t ^ 1.
•
If A is a convex set in V and (p ί A — ^ W, (¥ a real vector space) is a map such that, for x, y ζ: A, 0
t <1
(p(t X + (1-t) y) = t φ(χ) + (1-t) cp(y), then also we call cp linear. It is easy to see that
(p is the
restriction to A of a linear map of V (which is uniquely defined on the linear manifold spanned by A). Ex. 1.3.7. Let A, V, W be as above and (p ; A that op is linear if and only if the graph of of φ is the subset of V X W
> W a map. Show is convex, (graph
consisting of " (x, y), χ t A, ys cp(x)).D
15
Ex. 1,3·8· The images and preimages of convex sets under a linear map (resp. open convex sets) are convex sets (resp. open convex sets). The images and preimages of linear manifolds under a linear map are again linear manifolds. D A hyperplane Ρ in V for instance is the preimage of 0 under a linear map from V to j]^ . Thus with respect to some basis of V, Ρ is given by an equation of the form ^
x^ - d,
where x^ are co-ordinates with respect to a basis of V and deiR not all theJ^. s being zero. Hence V -· Ρ consists of two connected components
(
^
"
^
i
^i
which
we will call the half-spaces of V determined by P. A half space of V is another example of an open convex set. 1.3.9. Definition. A bisection of a vector space V consists of a triple (Pj-H , Η ) consisting of a h3φerpl·ane Ρ in V and the two half spaces H"*" and Η
determined by P.
These will be used in the next few section. remarks: Let the dimension of V = m and V
A few more
be a (m - ,k)-dimensional
subspace of V. Then extending a basis of v' to a basis of V we can express v' as the intersection of (k-l) subspacejof V of dimension (m-l). Thus any linear manifold can be expressed as the intersection of finite set (non unique) of hyperplanes. Also we can talk of hyperplanes, linear submanifolds etc. of a linear manifold Μ in V. These could for example be taken as the translates of such from the corresponding subspace of V or we can consider them as intersections of hyperplanes and linear manifolds
16
in V with Μ. Both are equivalent.
Next, the topology on V is
taken to be topology induced by any Euclidean metric on V. The » topology on subspaces of V inherited from V is the same as the unique topology defined by Euclidean metrics on them. And for a linear manifold Μ we can either take the topology on Μ induced from V or from subspace of V of vrtiich it is a translate. Again both are the same. We will use these hereafter without more ado. t.4»
The calculus of boundaries.
1.4.1. Definition. Let A be an open convex set in V. A point X ζ: V - A is called a boundary point of A, if there exists a point a ξ; A such that 0(x, a) ^A.
The set of all boiindary points of
A is called the boundary of A and is denoted by δ A. A number of propositions will now be presented as exercises, and sometimes hints are given in the form of diagrams. In each given context a real vector space is involved even when it is not, explicitly mentioned, and the sets we are considering are understood to be subsets of that vector space. Ex. 1.4.2. A linear manifold has empty boundary. Conversely, if an open convex set A has empty boundary, then A is a linear manifold.
D
Remark; This uses the completeness of real nimbers. Ex. 1.4.3. If (P 5 H^, H~) is a bisection of V, then d H^ = "6H~ = Ρ and δ Ρ = 0. 1.4.4. Proposition.
Π
If A is an open convex set and χζτ'^Α, then
for all b e A, 0 (x, b)(^A.
17
Proof; Based on this picture: There is
'a' such that 0(x, a)(^A.
Extend a, b to a point
c ζ: A. For
any q ^ 0(x, b), there exists a ρ 6 0(xj a) such that qtCKc, p).. Since c, ρ ^ A, q 6 A, Hence o(x, h)QA. Ex.
α
5. Let Cp : V
^W
open convex set in W. Then then equality holds. t.4.6. Definition.
be a linear map, and let Β be an φ
ςΒ). If Cf is onto
• The closure of an open convex set A is
defined to be k u h k ; it is denoted by A. Ex. 1.4.7. If k Q B , then "Α^Β-
•
1.4.8. Proposition. If a, b ^ A and a ^ b, where A is an open convex set, then there is at most one χζ^^λ
such that b t:
x)·
Proof: If b e 0(a, x) and beO(a, y) ; x, y OA, x ^ j, then 0(a, x) and 0(a, y) lie on the same line, the line through a and b and both, are on the same side of a as b. Either χ or y must be closer to a i.e. either χ
y) or
y€:0(a, x). If x^.O(a, y), then x6 A, but Anbk - φ. Similarly y<:0(a, x) is also impossible. Q 1,4.9«
Proposition. Let ^XQ
x^"^ be an independent set
whose convex hull is contained in ^ A, where A is an open convex set. Let a^A.
Then ^XQ
Xj^i ^ ^
independent.
18
Proof; 1.4.8 shows that each point of
IC^Xq j···*
a • can be
written as a unique convex combination. Hence by 1.2.6 x^ > a !-is independent.
Ο
1.4.10. Let A and Β be open convex sets. If bC^A, then ΐ^Β e c)A. Proof; Based on this picture: The case A or Β is empty is b
Β
W
trivial. Otherwise, let x^c)B, btB, a e A; extend the segment
b, a^ to a'fA. Let
p6 0(x, a); then qtO(x, b) can be found such that ρ €0(q, a')· Since qi:0(x,
it
follows that 0(q, a')C ^^ therefore p ^ A, Hence 0(x, a) obviously χ does not belong to A and so χζ'^Α. C! 1.4.11. Definition.
If A and Β are open convex sets, define
A < Β to mean A Q ^B. 1.4.10 implies that <
is transitive.
Ex. 1.4. 12. If A is an open convex set, then "5 is convex. % Hint:
•
19
1.4.13. Proposition.
If Λ and Β are open convex sets with
A Λ Β / 0 , then c)(A ΛΒ) is the disjoint union of ΑΠ^Β
and
Π B,
8ΑΠ5Β.
Proof; These three sets are disjoint, since A A ^ A = Β ο ^ Β i 0. LETE&ARXB ^
and χ
A A B); since x e V - ( A n B ) =
(V ~ A)U (V - B), X either (l) belongs to V - A and to V - Β or (2) belongs to V - A and to Β or (3) belongs ,to A and to V -
B.
Since 0(x,
οΧΙΙΑΓιΒ,
in case
(1) χ € δ A Π δ B,
in case (2) xC-c)Ar\B' and in case (3) x € Ar\c)B. The converse , is similarly easy.
•
Another way of stating 1.4.13 is to say that A r\ Β = A Π Β , when A Π Β / 0. 1.4.14. Proposition. If A and Β are open convex sets and A C Β and A A Β / 0 , then
B.
Proof? Let c e A Γ\Β, and a € A. The line from
'c' to 'a'
may be prolonged a little bit to a' A. Since a'6B, it follows that 0(a', c) C B, but a e 0(a', c). Hence
A^B.O
1.4.15. Proposition. If A = B/ where A and Β are open convex sets, then A = B. Proof: If A Π Β = 0, since A U δΑ = Β U Βζ^^Α. By 1.4. 10 we have A C ^ A ΑπΒα
0 = ΒΠΒβ.
and
and B C ^B. But
Hence ΑΓ\ Β = 0 is impossible except for the
empty case. Then by 1.4.14, t.4.l6. Proposition. Let 0 (x^ of 0(x^
we have A C ^ B
x^). Then 0(x,
and bQ A. Therefore A ^ B. χ^) denote the closure x^) = /ζ. ^x^
x^ ^ .
20
Proof; First, Κ [x,
For let
y ς. Κ [x^ ,·'·, ^n} '
^
" ··· " ^n V
convex linear combination
^^Η
'
' ^n^^
Then every point on the line segment 0(y, z) is obviously expressed as an open convex combination of 0(y, z) Q
0(x^
Xj ,..,, x^ j hence
x^), and so y £ 0(x^
Conversely, let y C 0(x, clearly y€ Κ
.x^^J
x^^).
x^). If y e 0(x^
. Suppose y &
x^),
x^); let
ζ = I (Xj + ... + x^) as above. On the line segment 0(y, z), pick a sequence a^ of points tending to y. Now, a^ € 0(y, z) C 0(x^ >· · ·, a. 1 = r.1, x,1 +
C
>· · · > x^}Let •
+ r. χη, r. X, are bounded by
1. By going to
subsequences if necessary we can assume that the sequences ^^ij^ converge for all j, say to r^. Then I·. J ^ r j y e Κ Jx,
= 1, r^
and
converge to ^ x \ . But J J J 1 n^ X. also converge to y. Hence y - Χϋ r. x. and J J J ,..., x^^ . Q
1.4.17. Definition.
An open convex set A is said to be bounded,
if for every line L in V, there are points x, y ζ L, such that
AO LC&> y2 · Since in any case Α Π L is an open convex set, either A O L is empty, or A O L
consists of a single point, or
ΑΛί
is an open interval, possibly infinite on L. The boundedness of A then-implies that if A H L
contains at least two points, there
21
are
yξ L
such that Α Λ L = 0 (x, y).
1β. Proposition, If Λ is a bounded open convex set containing at least two points, then 1 - k (3 A). Proof; Since ^ A(2 A and A is convex, it is always true that K.( d
A. Clearly
that A C K C d A ) .
A Qf(.{ d A). It remains only to show
Let a ^ A, Let L be a line through 'a'
and another point h ζ. A (such another point exists by hypothesis). Since A is bounded, and ^a, b^ £L Π A, it follows that A CsL ~ 0(x, y) for some x, y ^ L. Clearly x, γ ζ ^A, and at [x, y3Ci<( δ A). • Remark; With the hypothesis of 1.4. 1δ, we have A = [JV&, y^ ,
y 'a' a fixed point of A and y6 θΑ and A = U o (a, y)U{aj| . Ex. 1.4,19. If A and Β are open convex sets, and A<^ B, and Β is bounded, then A is bounded. Hints
Ο Β
22
Ex. 1.4.20. Let A be an open convex set in V, and Β ^be an open convex set in W. Then (1) A )(. Β is an open convex set in V X W ; (2) "δ (A%B) is the disjoint union of and δ A ^ b B ; (3) A are^ provided
'^ky^B,
A
^Β
is bounded if and only if A and Β
A / 0, Β ^ 0, Q
The following two exercises are some what difficult in the sense they use compactness of the sphere, continuity of certain functions etc. Ex. 1.4.21. The closure of A defined•above (1.4,6) coincides with the topological closure of A in V . D Ex. 1.4.22. An open convex set which is bounded in the sense of some Euclidean metric is bounded in the above sense, and conversely.Q 1.5. Convex cells. 1.5.1. Definition.
An open convex 'cell is defined to be a finite
intersection of hyperplanes and half spaces, ,which as an open convex set is bounded. Clearly the Intersection of two open convex cells is an open convex cell, and the product of two open convex cells is an open convex cell. With respect to a coordinate system in the vector space in which it is defined, an open convex cell-is given by a finite system of linear inequalities. If A is an open convex cell, by taking the intersection of all the hyperplanes used in defining A, we can write A = Ρ Π
OHj^ , where Ρ is a linear manifold
23
and H^ are half spaces.' Since H^ are open'in the ambient vector space Λ is open in P. Let A = Ρ' f\ H^'Π... Γ\ Η
' be another
such representation of A. If A is nonempty,. then Ρ = p'.. For A(^Pr\P'andif
P?^P', P A p '
is of lower dimension than P,
hence A cannot be open in P. Thus p'= P; though the f^s and h' /s J
may differ. Hence Ρ
can be described as the unique linear
manifold which contains A as an open subset. We define the dimension of the open convex cell A to be the dimension of the above linear manifold P. If A =
we define the' dimension of A to be -1.
If A is an open convex cell, we vdll call A a closed convex cell. The boundary of a closed convex cell is defined to be the same as the boundary of the open convex cell of which it is the closure.
This is well defined, since A = Β implies A = B, when
A and Β are open convex sets (1.4.15). The dimension of A is defined to be the same as the dimension of A. Using 1.2.9 and 1.2.10, it is easily seen that the dimension of A is one less than the cardinality of maximal independent set contained in A or A. Similar remark applies for A also. Actually,using this description we can extend the definition of dimension to arbitrary convex sets. Ex. 1.5.2. If A is an open convex cell of dimension K, and A^ ,..., A^ are open convex cells of dimension
K, then
ua^. • 1 • 5. 3· Proposition. An open k-simplex is' an open convex cell of dimension k.
A closed k—simplex is a closed convex cell of
24
dimension k. Proof; It is enough to prove for the open k-simplex. Let the open k-simplex be
x^) =.A in the vector space V. The the
unique linear manifold Ρ containing A is the set of points
rQ x^ +
^ ^k V " '
Then H^ = qp^ Ρ
and 0(xq
^k
"· ^k " ^ ^i
(0,σΟ )
' ^i
''itR·
Define
^ linear map from F to
.
is a half space relative to the hyperplane
x^) = Η^Λ .. OH^..
By extending H^ to half
spaces H^' in V suitably, 0(xq ,. ., x^^) = Ρ A Hq'a ... Λ Hj,'. Boundedness of A, and that dim A = k are clear« • 1.5.4. Proposition. Let A be a nonempty open cell. Then there is a finite set (p = ^A^ j-»ft» A^ ^ whose elements are open convex cells, such that (a) A =
U
Α.. 1 < i^ k ^
(b) A^n A^ = 0 if i
j
(c) A is one of the cells A i (d) The boundary of each element of (p is union of elements of
be
the set whose elements are nonempty sets of the following sort: Let
n}=
J .
Then if it is not empty the set Ρ Γ\Η.θ... ΠΗ. Π Ρ, Π .... Π Ρ, "^q^ ^ ^n-q)
•25
is -an element of P. The properties of Q!) follow from 1,4^.13.0 If the above, the union of elements of ^ constitute the boundary ^ A of A. Then using remarks preceding U5.2, we have, if
excluding A
1,4.9/ and the
(p, A. / A, then
dim A^ ^ dim A, We have seen that if A is a bounded open convex set of dim ^
1, then A = ^ ( ^ A), Hence by an obvious induction,·
we have 1.5.Proposition.
A closed convex cell is the convex hull of a
finite set of points. Q A partial converse of 1.5.5, is trivial: 1.5.6. The convex hull of a finite set is a finite union of open (closed) convex cells.' D The converse of 1.5.5 is also true. Μ
Ex. t.5.7· The convex hull of a finite set is a closed convex cell. Hints Let J^x^ >·'·> 1.4.16
^x^
^ finite set in vector space V. By ~ ^
x^)· It is enough to show
that 0(x^ }.·.) x^) is an open convex cell. Let Μ be the linear manifold generated by ^x^
· Let dim Μ = k . Write
A = 0(x^ J... J x^) -J A = K. ^ ^ ,..., x^^ . A is open in M. To prove tl:^e proposition it is enough to show that A is the intersection of half spaces in M. Step 1. A and
A are both union of open (hence closed) simplexes
with vertices in ^ ^ 1.2.7.
. The assertion for A follows from
26
Step :2. If Β is a (k-1)-simpiex in ^ Λ and Ν is the hyperplane in Μ .defined by B, then A cannot have points in both the half spaces defined by Ν in Mi Step 3.. It is enough to show that each point of closed
(k-1 )-simplex with vertices in
^A belongs to a
-^x^
x^^"· ·
Step 4. Each point χfcbA is contained in a closed vd-th verticer in
^x^
» To prove this let C^ )»··>
be the closed simplexes contained in x^ jii.j x^
which contain x^
(k-1simpleχ
c) A with vertices in
and Dj 3..., D^ ( C"^^) which do
not contain x. by Step I) U C. Ο D. - ^ A^ Consider any point i j , a ^ A and a point bfe0(a, x). Let C^ (resp. D^ ) denote the closed simplex whose vertices are those of C. (resp. D.) and 'a'.. ' J By the remark following 1.4.18. U C.' W D.' ^ A, Show that r i ^ j ^ then
C^
is a neighbourhood of b. If dim G^^k-1
for all i,
dim C^'^ k-1 for all i. Use 1.5.2 to show that in this
case [J C^
cannot be a neighbourhood of b.
Q
Since the linear image of convex hull of a finite set is also the convex hull of finite set, 1.5.?, immediately gives that the linear image of a closed convex cell is a closed convex cell. If A is an open convex cell in V and ψ
a linear map
from V to W, then φ(Α) = <φ(Α), by 1.4.16, hence by 1.4.15 C|)(A) is an open convex cell. Therefore 1.5.5. Proposition. The linear image of an open (resp. closed) convex cell is an open (resp. closed) convex cell. Q
27
It6. Presentations of polyhedra If ^ is a set of sets and A is setj we shall write .
AV^iP
when A is a union of elements of (p . For exaijiple (d) of U5.4 can be expressed as "If A ^ (p, then
'bAV"(p
We make the
obvious convention, when 0 is the empty set> that φ matter what (p U6iU
no
is.
Definition. A polyhedral presentation is a finite set (p
whose elements are open convex cells, such that A ζ (p Implies bAVp. 1.6.2. Definition. sentation ^
A regular presentation is a polyhedral pre-
such that any two distinct elements are disjoint, that
is,
implies A Π B = 0.
Ex, The (p of proposition 1,5.4 is a regular presentation. t.6.3· Definition.
A simplicial presentation is a regular pre-
sentation whose elements are simplicies and such that if A then every face of A also belongs to (p . If
(ps·^® polyhedral presentationsj we call Q j
subpresentation of ^
, If ^
a
is regular (resp. simplicial) then(^
is necessarily regular (resp. simplicial). The points of the 0-cells of a simplicial presentation will be called the vertices of the simplicial presentation. The dimension of a polyhedral presenΡ tation^is defined to be the maximum of the dimensions of the open cells of (p . 1.6.4. Definition. li" (p is a polyhedral presentation
|(pl will
28
be used to denote the union of all elements of
» We say that(J)
is a presentation of ^(J·^ or that ^(p^ has a presentation
,
Recall that in 1.1, we have defined a polyhedron as a subset of a real vector space, which is a finite union of convex hulls of finite sets. It is clear consequence of 1.5.4, 1.5.5 and 1.5.6 that t,6.5. Proposition. Every polyhedron has a polyhedral presentation. If (p is a polyhedral presentation, then
is a polyhedron. D
Thus, if we define a polyhedron as a subset of a real vector space which has a polyhedral presentation, then this definition coincides with the earlier definition. 1.6.6. Proposition. The union or intersection.of a finite number of polyhedra is again a polyhedron. Proof; It is enough to prove for two polyhedra say Ρ and Q. Let φ and Q) be polyhedral presentations of Ρ and Q respectively. Then
is a polyhedral presentation of Ρ \JQj hence Ρ U Q
is a polyhedron. To prove that Ρ Π Q is a polyhedron, consider the set
consisting of all nonempty sets of the form A Π B,
for
and Β t©^·
It follows from 1.4.13 that
polyhedral presentation. Clearly \ Ρ Π Q is a polyhedron. If X C Y
is a
| = Ρ Π Q. Hence by 1,6.5
Q polyhedra, we will call X a subpolyhedron'
of Y. Thus in 1.6.6, Ρ Γ\ Q is a subpolyhedron of both Ρ and Q. 1.6.7. li* (p
0"» sre two polyhedral presentations consider
the sets of the form A K B ,
A ^(p ,
Clearly A X Β is
29
an open convex cell, and by 1.4.20 b (AXB) is the disjoint union of
bA X
the fom if both ρ
B, A / S 5 b
and ό A > 0 B. Thus the set of cells of
A X B , A^(p., Β ^ (3i is a polyhedral presentation, regular and
are. This we will denote by (p y.
.. As above,
we have, as a consequence that Ρ K Q "is a polyhedron, with · presentation ^ X
.
Ex. 1.6.8, The linear image of a polyhedron is a polyhedron (follows from the definition of polyhedron and the definition of linear map).Q Recall that we have defined a polyhedral map between two polyhedra as a map whose graph is a polyhedron. 1.6.9· Proposition.
The composition of two polyhedral maps is a
polyhedral map. Prooft
Let X, Y and
Ζ be three polyhedra in the vector spaces
U, V and W respectively, and let f ί X polyhedral maps. Then ~P(f)(^ U polyhedra.
By 1.6.7,
^ Y, g : Y
V and P ( g ) C _ V
and X A p ( g )
are
are also polyhedra
ζ)Γ\( 'ί )
in U>tsV><.W. By 1.6.6,
> Ζ be
' is a polyhedron.
This intersection is the set S : ^(x, y, z) ( X ^ X, y = f(x), ζ = g(y)j in U A V X W .
By 1.6.8 the projection of U y ^ V X W
to
UKW
takes S into a polyhedron, which is none other than the graph of the map g ο f : X .
^ Z. Hence g ο f is polyhedral. Q
If a polyhedral map
f :Ρ
^ Q, is one-to-one and onto
we term it a polyhedral equivalence. Ex. 1.6.10. If, f 5 Ρ
^ Q is a polyhedral map, then the map
30
f': Ρ
^P(f) defined by f'(x) = (x, f(x)) is a polyhedral
equivalence. 1.6.11. Dimension of a polyhedron. The dimension of a polyhedron Ρ is defined to be Max. dim C
j C ^(p » where (p is any polyhedral presentation of P. Of course we have to check that this is independent of the
presentation chosen. This follows from 1.5.2. Let Ρ and Q be two polyhedra and f : Ρ a polyhedral map. Let
^ Q be
: Ρ X. Q — ^ , Ρ and jJu : Ρ ^ Q
be the first and second projections. If "PCf), then the open cells of the form
> Q
is any presentation of (C), CT
presentation of P, regular if and only if ^
is. a
is regular. If f
is a polyhedral equivalence, then the cells of the form |Jl(C), C ^
is a presentation of Q. This shows that
1.6.12. Proposition. invariant.
The dimension of a polyhedron is a polyhedral
α
1.7. Refinement by bisection. 1.7. 1. Definition. If say that (p refines
and
are polyhedral presentations, we
, or (p is a refinement of
provided
(a) (b) If
Aei(p, and
In otherwords, ^
and
B ^ C ^ , then AAB = 0 or
ACb.
are presentations of the same
polyhedron and each element (an open convex cell) of (p is contained in each element of
which it intersects. Hereafter, when there
31
is no confusion, we vd.ll refer to open convex cells and closed convex cells as open cells and closed cells. A polyhedral presentation is regular if and only if it refines itself. Let (3 = (P ; H^, H~) be a bisection of the ambient vector space V (1.3.9); G^ a polyhedral presentation offi.polyhedron in V, and let A ξ (2.. We say 'that
admits a bisection by
(B at A, provided; Whenever an open cell A, ζ. Q. intersects B a (i.e. A, n d A i Φ), and dim A^ < dim A, then either A^
Ρ or
or
(in particular this should be true
for any cell in the boundary of A). If (j^ admits a bisection by (J^ at A, then we define a presentation Q
as follows, and call it the result of bisecting
by (3 at A; consists of
with the element
the nonempty sets of the form, Α Π Ρ or
A removed, and with
E* or A n h"^
that is d
=U(I-iA})
A O H ^ A π η"}
^
I
By 1.4.13j and the definition of admitting a bisection, Q , a polyhedral presentation.
Clearly
refines
is
, if ^ ^ is
regular. We remark that it may well be the case that A is contained in Ρ or h"^ or H~. In this event, bisecting at A changes nothing at all, that is
= CS- . If this is the case
we call the bisection trivial. It is also possible, in the case of
m
32
irregular presentations, that some or all of the sets ΑΛΡ, A Λη·*·, A Π Η
may already be contained in Q . - ^A] in
this event, bisection will not change :§,s much as we might expect. Ex. 1.7.2». Let A and Β be two open cells,, with dim A.^dim Β and A / B. Let
(B
: fp J h!
hTI
be bisections of
space such that A is the intersection of precisely one element from some of the
(β .'a.. J
that Β Π Ρ
BOH
If A Π Β / 0, then 3 .and Β Λ H~
an S.
1 ^
m, such
are all non vacuous. Q
What we are aiming at is to show that every polyhedral presentation ^
has a regular refinement,, which moreover is obtained
from (p by a particular process (bisections).
The proof is by an
obvious double induction; we sketch the proof below leaving some of the details to the reader. 1.7.3. Proposition
REFI ( (p ,. (P' j {s^)
There is a piOcedure) whidh) applied to a polyhedral presentation (p , gives a finite sequences cells by bisections of space), which start on and
of bisections (at , give end result (p ,
is a regular presentation which refines ^ ..
Proof: Step 1. First, we find a finite set
(B . ;·("ρ 5 H'^j H ] , j = 1,.,.n
J
j
3 jJ
of bisections of the ambient space, such that every element of (p is an intersection one element each from some of the (3 j's». This is possible because every-element of ^
is a finite intersection of
hyperplanes and half spaces,, and there are only a finite number of elements in (p
33
Step 2. Write (p = (p^, index the cells of (p^ in such a way that the dimension is a non decreasing function. That is define p^ to be the cardinality of fp , arrange the elements of Μ 0 such that dim D^^ dim for all - 0 < k ^ κ >«5t
fp as D^,..., D*^ , vJ 0 0 , Pq ρ - 1. Ο
Step 3. SQ ^ denotes the process of bisecting ^ ^ Inductively, we define S^ tPojk: ^^ i+1
to be the process of bisecting
G^i 5
(Po k+1
defined since the elements of nondecreasing dimension.
Step 4. Write
at D^ by
result. This is well
^ are arranged in the order of
This can be done until we get S„
i = (PQ ρ
and
^ repeat step (2) and then the step (3)
with bisection
(j^j instead of 2 And so on until we get
is clearly a refinement of ^
=
is regular. Each element by
φ
. 1 (O , when the process stops, (p ^ η y η ; it remains to show that belongs to some
fp
^
and
each element of (p -is a finite intersection of exactly one element each from a subfamily of the (p) s. It is easily shown by double J induction that if A ^ Ο , then for any j, i ^ 0 $ either α Γ P. ^ η J or A(2h. or H^. That is 0 admits a bisection at A by · J j V η (Β. for any j, but the bisection is trivial. Let C , D
e (P
,C
C ο D ^ 0, dim C ^ dim D, Then since C is an intersection of one element each from a subfamily of the (j^ .'s, by 1.7.3, there exists an
such that D Π Pj|_ , D Π H^ and D O, Η £
But this is a contradiction.
Hence (p
are all nonempty.
is regular. Write
D
34
+ Ρ^
(Pn-
j· This gives the
Ό
"REFI ((P . p', {s.p".
Q
We can now draw a number of corollaries; 1.10.4. Corollary.
Any polyhedron has s. regiolar presentation. Q
U10.5.
Any two polyhedral' presentations (p »
Corollary.
of the same polyhedron X have a common refinement obtained from
^
, which is
and from G^ by a finite sequence of bisections.
To see thisJ note that ^ of X. The application REFI
is a polyhedral presentation ^
provides (p. .
Let ^T^^ and ^U^ | denote the subsequences applying to respectively; observe that they both result in (j^ .
and
D
1.10.6. Corollary. Given any finite number
(P
polyhedral presentations, there is a regular presentation ^ with
^l(prl ' (p j_| =
^
subpresentations
of of
>·.·>
>
for all i and φ) . is obtained from
_
by a finite sequence of bisections. This is an application of R Ε F I ( φ and an analysis of the situation.
Q
y .. ^ ^
,
35
Chapter II Triangulation As we have seen, every polyhedral presentation φ) regular refinement.
has a
This implies that any two polyhedral presentations
of X have a common regular refinement, that if Χζ] Y are polyhedra there are regular presentations of Y
containing subpresentations
covering X, etc.. In this chapter we will see that in fact every polyhedral presentation has a simplicial refinement, and that given a polyhedral map Ρ
f : Ρ ——^ Q, there exist simplicial presentations of
and Q with respect to which f is "simplicial",
2.1. Triangulation of polyhedra.. A simplicial presentation
of a polyhedron X is also
known as a linear triangulation of X, We shall construct simplicial presentations from regular ones by "barycentric subdivision". 2.1. 1. Definition.
Let ^
be a regular presentation.
of (p is a function Τ| : (p
> such that
A centering G, for
every C ζ; p . In other words, a centering is a way bo choose a point each from each element (an open convex cell) of (p . 2.1.2. Proposition.
"^q
^]
^k ^^^ elements of (p ,
ordered with respect to boundary relationship, then
(C^),,..,
is an independent set for any centering T^ of ^ » Proof; Immediate from 2.1.3. Proposition.
1.4.9?
by induction.
D
Suppose that φ) is a regular presentation and
36
C^^p. C is the disjoint union of all open simplexes of the form
where A^ ^ ^ Proof;
, ^o < ^^ <
By induction.
of dimension < form 0
< \
and
Assume the proposition to be true for cells
dim C.
^ C is the union of all simplexes of the
η(Α^), ... ,η(Α^)) where A.
and AQ<_ ..
A^ (since <
, A. <
C
is transitive). Since C is abounded
open convex cell C is the union of 0( Tl(C), x), χ ^^C and
(C)
(see the.remark following 1.4.18). Now 2.1,2 completes the rest. D It follows from 2.1.2 and 2.1.3, that if (p is any regular presentation, then the set of all open simplexes of the form 0( η(θ^),
^(Cj^)), for C.
a simplicial presentation of
, with CQ< ..
, is
. This leads to the following
definition and proposition. 2.t.4. Definition. of ^
If |p is any regular presentation, Y| a centering
; the derived subdivision of ^
open simplexes of the form 0( CQ<1 ...
^(Qq),
relative to Y| is the set of
^(^j^))
. It is a simplicial presentation
, "^i ^
(of ^(p
(P >
) and is
denoted by d ((p , rj ). The vertices of d ((P , "Γ| ) are precisely the points (0-cells) 'Tj (C) , C
When Vj is understood, or if the particular
choice of T| is not so important, we refer to d( derived subdivision of ^
,
) as a
and denote it by d(p .
2.1.5· Proposition. Every polyhedral presentation admits of a simplicial refinement. Q
37
Hence every polyhedron can be triangulated. 2.2. Triangulation of maps. Now, we return, to polyhedral maps. If f : Ρ •—^ Q is a polyhedral map, we have seen that the map f': P - 9 T ( f )
given by f'(x) = Qx , f(x)) is a polyhedral
equivalence and that any presentation of ~P(f) gives a presentation of Ρ by linear projection. Also, we saw in 1.3, that if A is a convex subset of vector space V and ^ : A — ^
W a map of A
into a vector space W,
ί Ql — ^
A,, AgeCJL, A, 4
is called combinatorial if for all
A^ implies
φ(Α^) ^ φ(Α2).
But unfortunately there may be several distinct polyhedral tasips
— 1 ^ 1 inducing the same combinatorial map
and a map ^ (JL | — ^
( J L — ,
inducing some combinatorial map (JL —^(j?)
need not even be polyhedral (We will see more of the-se when we come to 'standard mistake'). a unique map
If turns out that a map
— ^ (12) induces
— — ^ \Φ>) ^^ ^ require that the induced map
to be linear on each cell of (JL · Bu.t in this case it is sufficient to know the map on 0-cells (vertices); one can extend by linearly. This naturally leads to simplicial maps. 2.2.2. Definition. Let X and Y be polyhedr-a,
and
^
3S
simplicial presentations of X and Y respectively. f ;X
A map
^ γ is said to be simplicial with respect to
and ^
,
iff 1) f maps vertices of each simplex in into the vertices of some simplex in
.
and 2) f is linear on the closure of each simplex in ^
. /
f is polyhedral, since its graph has a natural simplicial presentation isomorphic so ^ Let ^ (resp. ^ Q ) ^
·
of Λ
and ^
.
be two simplicial presentations.
be the set of vertices of Ji (resp. ^
—^^^
^^ ^
Sl simplicial map from
2.2.3. Ebcample. If φ centerings of ^
^
). If
carries the vertices of a simplex
into the vertices of some simplex of ^
say cii
Let
: ^D — ^
and
to ^
, then
(also) we vdll
.
is a combinatorial map
yj , Q
respectively, the map which carries Tj (c
to 0 ( (p(C)) is a simplicial map from d((p , η ) to d(
0).a
We now proceed to show that every polyhedral map is simplicial with respect to some triangulations. Let Ρ and Q be two polyhedra and f ; Ρ — ^ polyhedral map. Let (p , T^(f)(^P XQ.
and ^
be presentations of P, Q and
Let Ql be a regular presentation of Ρ X Q
refines
^-^d let
Q be a
which
be the subpresentation of
which covers "Πίί)· Let
and ^
be the projections of Ρ
Q onto Ρ and
39
Q respectively. tation
(^Λ
By the refinement process there is a regular present
of Q refining
If ·Α
such that:
,c 6
ΑΠρ-(Ο) / 0 , then
Then, if C ^ (2 , ^(C) is the union of elements of Now we look at the presentations of "yi (f). The cells of
C" = CO(AXB'),
C
^
On the other hand, since open cell Β
=
· ((pXO^')
are by definition of the fom
(2, Aejp , B' ^ (^λ
Clearly
is a refinement of
with B 3 b ' .
a refinement (3^ of (p (x, y) I: C
.
Since
C"CC 0 (j^^B').
, there is an
is a subpresentation of
, if , c" ^ 0, C C Α Χ B. Hence if
then -x T A, y Ζ, B', SO
Cn(uC\B')Ccr\(AXB') = C". Thus
(X, y) E A XB'.
C" =
Hence
Hence g"'
*
can be also described as
Now, clearly
(p ' = ^ ( g ' )
I D
regular presentation of Ρ ^ ^ TCi) is
1-1 and
a is lineai^with
reference to the ambient vector spaces . Now the claim is. that f induces a combinatorial map (
p(f))
(^D ' — ^ 0^'·
(A) is a cell of
Let A be any cell of (p '·
Ρ say some c Π jockB').
f(A) = fMC ^(c Π
= |A.(C)n B' = B' by (•). Thus is the
IS union
and "^C π the union of hence
5b') J (by 1.4.5) and so ^ C) r\ b', JAiC)
^ (C Λ f^C^s'))) , and (Λ ( 6 C)
Hence if A^^ A, f(A^) S^^B'. Thus f
Β',
40
induces a combinatorial map from the presentation
φ'
(p
to
comes from
to the closure of each cell of
^^
Moreover, since
the graph of f restricted is a closed cell, and hence f
is linear on the closure of each cell of
(p ' ·
The discussion so far can be summarized as: 2.2.4. Theorem. Let f : Ρ •—^ Q be a polyhedral map, and let polyhedral presentations of Ρ and Q respectively. Then there exist regular refinements
and
^
of φ and
such
that I 1) to
^
If A
I
t
( p , f(A) ^ ^ .
The. induced m a p from ' ( p
i s combinatorial. I 2) f is linear on the closure of each cell of
Qi
Furthermore, 2.2, 5.
If ^ϋ) and ^
tation
of 'p(f)
are regular and if there is a regular presensuch that
a) For each C £
, 7\(C) is contained in some element
b) For each C
,
of (p , is the union of elements
of ^ , then in the above theorem we can take
^
=
(in
other words, a combinatorial map can be found refining only ^ not
,
). To apply 2,2.4 to the problem of simplicial maps, we can
use 2.2.3 as follows: First we choose some centering 0 of I and then a centering Ύ| of ^ so that f( Ύ|(θ)) = θ (f (C)) for all C 6(p'.
41
ι
Since
f is linear an each element of I
, we have that f ί Ρ
>Q
I
is simplicial with respect-to d( φ) , η ) and d(
, Q). Hence,
2.2.6. Corollary. Given a polyhedral map f ; Ρ — ^
Q, there exist
triangulations ^
and
of Ρ and Q, with respect to which f
is simplicial. Moreover, J^ and ^ ^ can be chosen to refine any given presentations of Ρ and Q.
Q
'
Defining the source and target of a map f : Κ
^ L to
be Κ and L respectively. We may now state a more general result, details of the proof left as an exercise. 2.2.7. Theorem. Let ^K^ "^be a finite set of polyhedra, with 1 n; let f ί Κ ^ Κ be a finite set of polyhedral maps, the sources and targets being all in the given set of polyhedra. Suppose that for each Y
, ^ ^ < jiy^
^^
occurs as the
source of at most one of the maps f (i.e. Y ^ ^ implies Let
<ί. ξ )·
be a presentation of K y
of simplicial pre sent that for all Υ
, fy
for each Y . Then there is a set , with ^ y refining (py
, such
is simplicial with reference to
That is to say, the whole diagram
^ fy λ can be triangulated, Q
The condition on sources is not always necessary , for example; Ex. 2.2.8, A diagram of polyhedral maps
X
42
can be triangulated if f : X
^ Y is an imbedding.
However Ex. 2,2.9. The following diagram of polyhedral maps (each map is a linear projection)
cannot be triangiilated. Ex. 2.2.10. Let φ
U
be a presentation of a polyhedron Ρ in V,
Cp 5 V — > W be a linear map, then presentation of Ex. 2.2. 11. Let
φ ( (p) =
is a
φ (Ρ).Π f ίΡ
^ Q be a polyhedral map, and X a sub-
polyhedron of P. Then dim f(X) ^
dim X. D
Ex. 2.2.12. If f ; Ρ — ^ Q is a polyhedral map Y is a sub-1 polyhedron of Q, j. (γ) is a subpolyhedron of X. U Next, one can discuss abstract simplicial complexes, their geometric realizations etc. We do not need them until the last chapter. The reader is referred to Pontryagin's little book mentioned in the first chapter for these things.
43
Chapter III Topology and Approximation Since we know that intersection and vinion of two polyhedra is a polyhedron, we may define a topology on a polyhedron X, by describing sets of the form X - Y, for Y a subpolyhedron, as a basis of open sets. If, one the other hand, X is a polyhedron in a finite dimensional real vector space V, then V has various Euclidean metrics (all topologically equivalent) and X inherits a metric topology. Ex. These topologies on X are equal. The reason is that any point of V is contained in an arbitrary small open cell, of the same dime;ision as V. It is easy to see that a closed simplex with this topology is compact.
Hence every polyhedron, being a finite union of simplexes
is compact. The graph of a polyhedral map is then compact, and hence f is continuous.
Thus we have an embedding of the category of poly-
hedra and polyhedral maps into the category of compact metric spaces and continuous maps. It is with respect to any metric giving this topology that our approximation theorems are phrased. \
A polyhedron is an absolute neighbourhood retract, and the results that we have are simply obtained from a hard look at such results for A.N.R"s. It turns our that we obtain a version of the simplicial
44
approximation theorem, which was the starting point, one may say, of the algebraic topology of the higher dimensional objects. The theorem has been given a 'relative form' by Zeeman., and we shall explain a method which will give this as well as other related results. We must first say something about polyhedral neighbourhoods. 3. 1.» Neighbourhoods that retract. Let φ cells C of for such of Ο
regular presentations.
Consider the open
, with C Π \(p| / 0, together with A, A
C, Λ
The set of all these open cells is a subpresentationsN"
. \j\rlis a neighbourhood of |(p| in j ^ j . For, if Jsf'
is the set of cells c'^;(5^such that c'O ((p) = 0, then vj^^' is a subpresentation of
and
-
\
· If
is simplicial,
can be described as the subpresentation, consisting of open simplexes of
with some vertices in (p together with their faces.
^^(pCO^ is a subpresentation, we say that ^ in
J if for every C ζ·
either C
=0
is full
or there is a
A ζ: (p with C Py I (p) = A. In the case of simplicial presentations, this is the same as saying that if an open simplex
of
has all its vertices
in (p) , then g"· Itself is in ^ * An example of a nonfull subpresentation:
5
3.1.1.
If
regiilar presentations, then d (p
is full in
d Co . For, if Tj is any cehtering, then an element (an open simplex) of άφ^
is of the form 0( η
CQ<
If
... < C^.
that is in ip , then Ο(η(0ο),...,
3.. 1.2.
T](Ct)) e d(p
, are necessarily in (p
. Then
, and 0( η (CQ) ,...,
If ^ is full in
) Ο |d (p j
, the simplicial neighbourhood
ί i s t h e s u b p r e s e n t a t i o n o f d (3^ c o n s i s t i n g o f a l l
s i m p l e x e s o f d ^ w h o s e vertices vdth
C^ s
Q
Definition.
(P i s
, 0 ^ t ^ k, is the last element of the Cj, j ^
= 0( η(0ο)
^(Cj^)) ^Ο^^θ^
(CQ))
C Π |(p j
/ 0.
T | ( C ) are centers o f cells
I t i s denoted b y Ν
C of
(p ) (or N ^ ( ( p , T j )
w h e n w e want t o m a k e e x p l i c i t t h e centering). Clearly Ν
p ) is a full subpresentation of d
It can be also described as the set of elements cp of d which ψ Hence
r\ id(p| =
Ν ^ ( (p )
.
, for
plus the faces of such ^ . is a neighbourhood of
j ^ | in the topological
sense. Such a neighbo-urhood as
Ν
f) ) | of |(p( is usually
referred to as a 'second derived neighbourhood' of ^(p|in Ij0>| ' the following reasons
If Χζ^,Υ are polyhedra; to get such a
neighbourhood we first start with a regular presentation C?-of Y containing a subpresentation (jB covering X, derive once so that d(2) is full in d CTL , then derive again and take | ^dOX,^*^® ^ * Now we can define a simplicial map r ·. ^
(p ) — ^ d(p
46
using the property of fullness of (p in C Π C Π
/
. If C ^
we know that there is a A
, with
, such that
(pj = A, and this A is uniquely determined by C. We define
r ( η C) = η A. Ex. 3.1.3. The map r thus defined is a simplicial retraction of onto d(p
D
That is r is a simplicial map from which when restricted to d ^
to
d(P,
is identity, r defines therefore
a polyhedral map, which also we shall call r ; ^ ^ ((p ) — > |
·
We have proved 3.1.4.
If X is a subpolyhedron of Y, there is a polyhedron Ν
which is a neighbourhood of X in Y, and there is a polyhedral retraction r : Ν — ^
X. Ο
3.2. Approximation Theorem. We imagine our polyhedra to be embedded in real vector spaces(we have been dealing only with euclidean polyhedra) with euclidean metrics. • Let X, Y be two polyhedra, ρ ,
ρ' be
metrics on X and Y respectively coming from the-vector-spaces in which they are situated. If cjC , p) ·
^ ^
functions,
we define p(oC,i5 ) = Sup f (oC (x), ^(x)) xeY If A is a subset of X, we define diam A=-sup ρ (χ, y), X,y e A and if Β is a subset of Y, we define diam Β = Sup
f'(x,y) Β
47
We can consider X to be contained in a convex polyhedron Q. If X is situated in the vector space V, we can take Q to be large cube or the convex hull of X. Let Ν be a second derived neighbourhood of X in Q and r i Ν — ^ X be the retraction.' Now Q being convex and Ν a neighbourhood of X and Q/ for any sufficiently small subset S of X,
Ν
(recall that < (S)
denotes the convex hull of S),. This can be made precise in terms of the metric; and is a uniform property since X is compact. Next observe that we can obtain polyhedral presentations (p of X, such that diameter of each element of Φ
is less than a prescribed
positive number. This follows for example from refinement process. Now the theorem is 3.2,1. Theorem. Given a polyhedron X, for every ^ > 0, there exists a ί ^ 0 such that for any pair of polyhedra any pair of functions f : Y
^ X, g : Ζ
Υ, and
^ X with f continuous
and g polyhedral, if p(f| Z, g) < (S j then there exists a g polyhedral, i j ζ = g, and Proof;
fCf, g K ^ , .
We embed X in a convex polyhedron Q, in which there is
a polyhedral neighbourhood Ν and a polyhedral retraction r ;Ν
^ X as above. It is clear from the earlier discussion,
that given 6 >
there is a "v^ ;> 0,. such that if a set A
diameter < Υ| , then Κ Define
=
X has
Ν and diameter r ( /<(Α))<ξ .
^ /y
Now because of the uniform continuity of f, (Y is compact), there is a θ > 0, such that if Β
Y and diam. (B) < 0,
4δ
then diam f (B) <
C
From this it follows that, still assuming B([]_Y, and diameter B < Q , and additionally that set
P(fjZ, g)< ·5 ; that the
f(B) (J g(B A Z) has diameter less than 3 ^ = rv . And hence
we know that
f /I (f (B) (J g (B Γ\ Z))
N, and
Cdiam r(K(f (B) Ug'(B nZ))^ < e Then we find a presentation
.
of Y, such that the closure
rr of every element of ^
has diameter less than 0. Also there is a
presentation 5s oi" ^ on the closure of every element of which g is linear. Refining ^
U
taking derived subdivisions (still
calling the presentations covei-ing Y
and Z, as Λ
anc^espectively),
WB have the following situation; , are simplicial presentations, of Z ^ Y , on each closed
-simplex g is linear, the diameter of each closed
Λ -simplex
0.
We now define h ; Y — > V of ^ Extend
Q as follows: On a 0-simplex
, h(v) = g(v).. On a 0-simplex w of
-^
, h(w) = f(w).
h linearly on each simplex, this is possible since Q is
convex. But now, if then h( (5- )
jj- = [V^ ,..., v ^
(fC ^ ) U g( ?
Z))
is the closure of a /^-simplex, N; this is a computation
made above (•>!·) since diam. (j- < Q. And so h(Y)([jN.
Also it is the case that h is polyhedral,
since h is linear on the closure of each simplex of J^
and on
= Z, clearly, h agrees with g. Define, g : Y — ^ X to be r ο h. Since r and h are
49
polyhedral so is g ; since hj Ζ = g and r is identity on X; it follows that gjz = g. To compute
ρ(g , f) we observe that any
y £ Y is contained in some closed simplex f(y) and h(y) are contained in l( ( Γ
f ) U s( ^
both )f
hence
both f(y) and g(y) are contained in
r
g(
c )υ
^ ^
z)))
This set by (*) has diameter< ^ . Hence
p (g, f) < ^
Ο
We now remark a ntimber of corollaries: 3.2.2, Corollary. Let X, Y, Ζ be polyhedra, , Z Q y , and f : Y a continuous map such that
f Ζ is a polyhedral.
Then f can be
approximated arbitrarily closely by polyhedral maps g ; Y that g Ζ = f
^ X such.
z. a
The next is not a corollaiy of 3.2.1, (it could be) but follows from the discussion there. 3.2.3.
Any two continuous maps f^, f^ : γ · — ^ X, if they are .
sufficiently close are homotopic. not Y or the maps involved).
(Also how close depends only,on X,
If f^ and f^ are polyhedral, we
can assume the homotopy also to be polyhedral,, and fixed on any subpolyhedron on which f^ and
f^ agree.
Proofί Let Ν and X be as before. Let if A Q l , diam A < η
,, then
K(A)Cn.
be a n-umber such that If-f(f^,
F(y,t) = t f^(y) + (1-t) f2(y) 6 N, for and r . F, where r : Ν homotopy. If f^, f^
1 and all
y^Y
^ X is the retraction, gives the required
are polyhedral, we can apply 3.2.1 to obtain
a polyhedral homotopy with the desired properties.
^X
D
50
Remark; The above homotopies'are small in the sense, that the image of X is not moved too far from f^(x) and f2(x)· 3-2.4. Homotopy·groups and singular homology groups of a polyhedron can be defined in terms of continuous functions or polyhedral maps from closed simplexes into X. The two definitions are naturally isomorphic.
The same is true for relative homotopy groups, triad
homotopy groups etc. The corollary 3.2.2 is Zemman's version of the relative simplicial approximation theorem. From-this (coupled with 4.2.13) one can deduce (see M. Hirsch, "A proof of the nonretractibility of a cell onto its boundary", Proc. of A.M.S., 1963, Vol. 14), Brouwer's theorems on the noncontractibility of the n-sphere,.fixed point property of the n-cell, etc. It should be remarked that the first major use of the idea of simplicial approximation was done by L.E.J. Brouwer himself; using this he defined degree of a map, proved its homotopy invariance, and incidentally derived the fixed point theorem. It should be remarked that relative versions of 3.2.1 are possible.
For example define a pair
(X^, X2) to be a space (or a
polyhedron) and a subspace (or a subpolyhedron) and continuous (or polyhedral) maps f : (X^, X^) sort of function X^ Theorem 3.2.1
^ (Y^, Y^) to be the appropriate
^ X2 which maps
into Y2 . Then
can be stated in terms of pairs and the proof of this
exactly the same utilising modifications of 3.1.4 and the remarks at the beginning of 3.2 which are valid for pairs. Another relative version of interset is the notion of
51
polyhedron over A, that is, a polyhedral map f ! (^
S X — ^ A)
such that
cL. =
:Χ
^ A. A map
^ ( <55 ί Y - — ^ A) is a function f : X
> Y
· fj we can consider either polyhedral or continuous
maps. The reader should state and prove 3.2.1 in this context (if possible). 3.3. Mazur's criterion. We shall mention another result (see B. Mazur "The definition of equivalence of combinatorial irabeddings" Publications Mathematiques, No.3, I.H.E.S.j 1959) at this point, which shows that, in a certain sense, close approximations to enbeddings are embeddings (in an ambient vector space). Let
^ simplicial presentation of X, and let V be
a real vector space. Let
denote the set of vertices of ^ ^ .
Given a function C) :
V, we can define an extension
Φ
5 ^^ — b y
mapping each simplex linearly. Clearly if
is any polyhedron containing
We call φ
^ Y is
the linear extension of C) . Cp is called
an embedding if it Eiaps distinct points of X into distinct points in V. 3.3.1.
(Mazur's criterion for non-embeddings) If the linear extension φ
of Cp : o O ^ — ^ V is not
an embedding, then there are two open simplexes 5" and, with no vertic6'S in common, such that φ
of
(6~")Γ\
Proof; The proof i? in two stages. A>
V
If 6"= 0(vq
v^) and | 9 ( V Q )
is not indep.endent, then there are faces
ύ
and 6~2 of
φ(\)} 6~,
52
vdthout vertices in common, such that
(
) C\ φ(6~2) ^ 0
(This is just 1.2.6). B) Thus we can assume that for every (P .of ^
i-V ( , Cp
)
is also an open simplex of the same dimension. Consider pairs of distinct open simplexes^p , p 'j- such that Let
cy Τ be such a pair, which in addition has the property
dim g- + dim and
is minimal among such pairs. We can now^that
have no vertex in common. If
= 0(w^
w^), then if
0(vq
v^^) and
r-l
^
^
0""') ^ φ.
φ ( 6") Γ\ φ ( Τ )
0, there is an
equation
φ^ν ^ with r_+... + r 0 m
V = 0
=
··· ^
Ai,... + s . 1 η
strictly greater than 0, for otherwise dim
νHere r. and s. are X i dim ^
will not
be minimal. Now if v^ = w^, and r^ >
0
O'
and have a common vertex,, say, for example, s^. we can write
0-i^
0'
^
1
1
Multiplying by (1 - s^) , we see that some face of ^ intersects a proper face Cp^O (w^ that ^
( 6-)
of φ (
So
and fj' had not the minimal -dimension compatible- with the
properties Γ ^ ^ Τ
, φ(6~)Πφ rjJ
Now it easily follows, since to check CD is an embedding we need only
-check that finitely many compact pairs
Ιί^Φ ((f ) J $ ( τ )). > (Γ
τ
=
do not intersect;
53
3.3.2. Proposition. Let ^
be a simplicial presentation of X
contained in a vector space V, let ^ ^ Then there exists an £
such that if
be the set of vertices. Qp ; ^
- y V is any
function satisfying "^(v, φίv) )ζ; for all ν 6 linear extension φ
:X
^V
is an embedding.
, then the D
This is a sort of stability theorem for embeddings, that is^ if we perturb a little the vertices of an embedded polyhedron, we still have an embedding.
5i
Chapter IV Link and Star Technique 4.1, Abstract Theory I 4.1.1. Definition Suppose
(Join of open simplexes) 3-nd ^
vector space. We say that
are two open simplexes in the same
^ ^
is defined, when
(a) the sets of vertices of ^
and
are disjoint
(b) the union of the set of vertices of
and IT
is independent. In such a case we define
to be the open simplex
whose set of vertices is the union of those of
and of «Γ . If
β" is a 0-simplex, we will denote 6~ Τ X is the unique point in
^
or
{xj where
.
We also,, by convention, where g" (or Τ ) is taken to be the empty set 0, make the definition 0 6"- 6 - 0 = 5 " Clearly dim ^
= dim
+ dim Τ
+1, even when one
or both of them are empty. Ex. 4. t.2.
Τ
^^ defined if and only if (F
Τ
~ 0> and any
two open intervals 0(x, y) , 0(x', y') are disjoint, where Xj
0- J
y' ζ: Τ » ^ ^
the union of open
1-simplexes 0(x, y), xt C
In this case> yt
·
is Q
This is easy. Actually it is enough to assume
0(x, y) r\0(x', y') = 0 for x, x' e 6" , y, y ' 1
x / x' or y ^ y'
55
That it is true for points of (j" and
and
^
r\
= 0 follow
from this. Ex. 4. U3.
i'ftien ζ- cf
same as
is defined, the faces of
' , where
respectively.
ff ' and
If either
' ^
is a proper face of Ex. k. 1.4» In V ^
are the
faces of
and·^
Γγ'
, then
qf '
. 13
Let ^
and c^ be in ambient vector spaces V
W % iK , let
^
or
S" Τ
= Γ X 0 )< 0 and ^
=0
and W.
«f X ' · Then
is defined. Q
4. t.5. Definition. Let an element of
be a simplicial presentation, and «5~
, Then the link of ζ" in
denoted by ' Lk (
,
is defined as =
is defined, i
Lk (G- , ^ ) - ^
if r* =
Obviously Lk (
,
) is a subpresentation of
In case ζΤ is O-dimensional, we write Lk (x, Lk(
ί
. ) for
) where χ is the unique element in ^ .
Ex. 4.1.6. If Τ ζ Lk(
/Ϊ ), then
LK(CR , 4.1.7. Notation. If
)) = LK( R T , 4). D
is an open simplex, then ·|ςΓ~ j- and ^^
denote the simplicial present'ations of n- and
made up of faces
of (Γ . Ex. 4.1.8. If
= p ^ Lk (
, and dim p ^ 0, then
p , [d^} ) f^ L r ] ) =
will
r]
α
)
56
A..t.9. Definition. Let QL and (j^ be simplicial presentations such that for all if
QL , q;
6"'
or
£) / Γ Τ
defined, andQ-TOC
ff '. Then we say that the join of
is defined, and define the join of QLand (J})
0 and;^
, denoted by QL·^*· (R)
to be the set ί 5" ^ I Γ 6 O t J ft t (β ^ „·
By 4.1.3
(Tor cr may be empty"! but not both. j
^ simplicial presentation.
If 0
is empty, we define Q l * 0 = 0 * 0 ^ = (JL. In case 0 L and (j^ are presentations of polyhedra in V -V/ and W, then we construct, by 4.1.4, QX
and (p which are isomorphic
to 0Land(/6 5 and for which we can define 0 L ·ϊ<· (Jj . depends only on
It clearly
and (J^ upto simplicial isomorphismj in this way
we can construct abstractly any joins we desire. Ex. 4.1.-10.
OV.* (ii - β
* Ot
That is whenever one side is defined, the other also is defined and both are equal.
D
Ex. 4.1.11. If
,
Lk(oC(i, In particular, when
. then ) ^ Lk
*Lk ( (i
).
0,
Lk ( ο 6 , σ ι . * ( β ) = Lk CoC , 0 1 ) and when dC = 0 ,
Lk {β , If
ψ ,(B).n
is the presentation of a single point ^ vj , and is
joinable to (j^ , then we call
(JL*
J the cone on (Q with^vertex
57
ν, and denote it by CCijb). (κ) is called the base of the cone. If we make the convention^ that the unique regular presentation of a one point polyhedron v, is to be written {{v]j , then C((B) ) = jjvj] 4.1.12. Definition. Let
be a simplicial presentation, andg"^ J^ ,
Then the star of . cf in ^ be
, denoted by St{ ^ , Ji ), is defined to
Lk( r , i ). Clearly St( r , 4 ) is a subpresentation of
equal to
(J
Τ f
,
and is
·
In case tP contains only a single point x, we write St(x, Ex^ 4,1.13. Let / ξ be a simplicial presentation, (5~ an element of ^
. If ^
is a face of
with dim ^
Lk( ^ , Λ ) = 4. 1.14. Definition. k-skeleton of
* Lk( ^ , Λ ) ) . D
If /C is a simplicial presentation, the
, denoted by
/i
k is defined to be
= U {[^j j rf 4
Clearly Ex. 4.1.15. If
,
dim
is a subpresentation of
Γ ^ δ" ;
= dim Γ" - 1> then
k|.
/I.
and dim 5- = 1 , ( X ^ k), then j^) - Lk( 6", Λ
Ex. 4.1.16. Let f ; Ρ — respect to presentations
Q
_ ^ __
£3
be a polyhedral map, -simplicial with and
of Ρ and Q respectively.
Then
2) « «"ίτΛ .
C st(f
5δ
3) For every
^
if and only if f maps every a 1-simplex of
C Lk(f(6" ), Λ')
, f(Lk( Γ,Λ))
1-simplex of
onto
'.
(Strictly speaking, these are the maps induced by f). 4.2, Abstract Theory II 4.2.1.
Definition.
Let φ
centering of φ) , Let
be a regular presentation and Yj a
A t jp . Then the dual of A and the link
of A, vjith respect to
, denoted by
Q A and -Λ α
are defined
to be
CQ where
η ο ^ ) I A
k
0 j
t (p for all i. Clearly ^ A and
A are subpresentations of d ^ = d((p j'rj ).
When there are several regular presentations to be considered, we will denote these by
^(p·^ ^nd
^ A. Ύ^ will be usually omitted from
the terminology, and these will be simply called dual of A and link of A. 4.2.2. Every simplex of d ^ belongs to some 4.2.3.
A is the cone on
^ A with vertex
T| A. -O
Ex. 4.2.4. Let dim A = p, and consider any p-simplex ^ of d (p contained in A i.e. ^ = 0( B ^
BQ
... < B P = A, Then /\ A = Lk(
.., "Γ|ΒΡ), for some , d ( p ). •
4.2.5. Suppose (p is, in fact, simplicial. both
A and
Then we have defined
Lk(A,(p ). These are related thus:.
59
A vertex of There is a unique
^ A is of the form
Β of (p such that
Y| C where A <. C.
C = A B . T|B
is a typical
vertex of d(Lk(A, (f> )). The'correspondence Vj C
Β defines
a simplicial isomorphisni:
AAO
d (Lk {A,
(p )). Q
Ex. 4.2.6. With the notation of 4.2. 1, A < Β if and only if (5b C ΛΑ.
For any Α ^ ψ , /\A. is the union of all ζ Β
Ex. 4.2.7. If (p is simplicial, A, 3 £(p , then
for A <.B.D
5αγ\ ί Β / 0
if and only if A and Β are faces of a simplex of Q!) . If C is the minimal simplex of (p containing both A and Β (that C is the open simplex generated by the union, of the vertices of A and B), then
<5\AnS Β
c^.C. Ο
4.2.β. Definition. centering of ^
If (Ρ is a regular presentation and
, the dual k-skeleton of
defined to be k
a
, denoted by ,φ ^ is
• Γ
(P =
( Η CQ
CQ<
...
dim
CQ^
k,
k Clearly
^ - is a subpresentation of d(p , and is, in
fact the union of all all
A for dim A ^ k. It is even the union of
A for dim A = k.
C
Λ
^
Thus ο A, /Λ A, (p E^· 4.2.9.-
d(p= (P° 3 (p'
are all simplicial presentations. ...
3 (p""' = 0, where k
η
is the dimension of
. "Dim (p
= η - k. D
We shall be content with the computation of links of vertices of (p
60
Ex. 4.2.
If A ξ ρ
, dim A
Lk (V^ A, φ
k, then'
. [d A^^'^ λ k.
Ο
Next, we consider the behaviour of polyhedral maps vdth respect to duals. Let f : Ρ — 7 Q be a polyhedral map; let ^ and
be
two simplicial presentations of Ρ and Q respectively with respect to which f is simplicial. If /{p is a centering of ^
, it can
to a centering V^ of (p , that is f( Yj A) =-{r> f(A) for all A
. (see 2.2).
f is simplicial with respect to d((p ,'η )
and d(0) -ζη ) als». Now, 4.2.11. If Α ς ρ , f( 4.2.12. If Β t
A) C
Ο
then f"^ (<S Φ^Β) = U ^
A
J f( A) = Β ]. D
Remark; All these should be read as maps induced by f, etc. Since each such A must have dimension ^ dim B, we have 4.2.13. Proposition. With the above notation, for each
This property is dual to the property with respect to the usual skeleta "f ( (p , ) Κ
O^i'" · κ
4.2.14. Corollary. If dim Ρ = n, then dim f~\
^ η - k. Π
In particular, if dim Q = m, and q is a point of an (open) vn-dimensional simplex of
, f~^(q) is a4(n-m)-diinensional
subpolyhedron of P.
Ο
Ex. 4.2.15.
= (p ' J if and only if every 1~simplex off
f
is mapped onto a 1-simplex of (^N . (i.e. no 1-simplex of collapsed to a single point).
0
(p is
.
61
4.3. Geometric Theory. 4.3.1. Definition. Let Ρ and ' Q be polyhedra in the same vector space V. We say that the .ioin,.,of Ρ and Q is defined
(or Ρ » Q
is defined, or Ρ and Q are joinable)» if; (a) F η Q = 0 (b) If X, X' J 4
P, y, y' ζ. Q, and either x / x' or
then 0(x, y)Π 0(x', y') = 0.
If the join of Ρ and Q is defined, we define the join of Ρ and Q , denoted by Ρ * Q to be P^Q-
yl(xi:P, y
By definition, P. * 0 = 0 ^ Ρ = P. Every'point
ζ ^ Ρ * Q can be written as s
z=(l»t)
x + ty,xtP,y?:Q,
O^t^l.
The number t is uniquely determined by z; y is uniquely determined if ζ (: Ρ (i.e. if t ^ 0), χ
is uniquely determined if ζ
Q
(i.e. if t ^ 1). 4.3.2. Let φ
and
be simplicial presentations of Ρ and Q;·
and suppose the (geometric) join Ρ * Q is defined. Then by 4.1.2, the (simplicial) join (p ^^
defined, and we have jf
Ρ *
This shows that Ρ * Q is a polyhedron. • 4.3.3. Definition. If P^, Q^, P^, Q2 P^ * Q^ and P^ * Q2 are defined, and are maps, then the join of f and .
are polyhedra such that f : P^
^ P^, g : Q ^ — ^ Qg
denoted by f
g, is the map
from P^ * Q^ to P^ * Q^ given by, (f * g) ((1 - t) X + t y) = (1-..- t) f(x) + t g (y) y e Q i , 0 < t 41.
62
4.3.4. In the above if f ; P^ — ^ with, respect to (p ^, (p^;
P^, g ! Q^
.
> Q^ are simplicial
f ^^ g '· P,
is simplicial with respect to φ ^ ·ί<·
Pg ^ %
and (p ^ * Og · Thus the join
of polyhedral maps is polyhedrei,!. , D 4.3.5. If Ρ * Q is defined, (id)^) ^ (id.) = Id ρ „ . . If, P^ * Q^, P^ ^^ Q^, P^ * Q^ are defined and f^ : P^ ·' ^2
^
' §1 '
^
>
P2 ,
^ S
'
(f2 c f,) ^ (g^ ο g^) = (f^ * g^) 0 (f^ * g^) α This says that the join is a functor of two variables from pairs of polyhedra for which join is defined and pairs of polyhedral maps, to poljrhedra and polyhedral maps. The join of a polyhedron Ρ
and a single point ν is
called the cone on P, (sometimes denoted by C(P)) with base Ρ and vertex v, Ex. 4.3.6. C(P) is contractible.
Ο
Ex. 4.3.7. Ρ * Q - Q contains Ρ as a defomation retract. Hint;
Use the map given by (*) below · Q Let us suppose that Ρ * Q and the cone C(Q) with vertex
V are both defined.
The interval
lj is 0
1 ,
and so two
maps can be defined: oC ί Ρ ·«• Q — ^ [ 0 , OJ
the join of Ρ
> 0, Q
—1,
p5 : C (Q) — ^ [ 0 , j], the join of ν — > 0, Q
) 1.
Simply speaking, p((l~t)x+ty) = t oC( (1 - t) V + t y) = t , for χ
y e <2.
63
The correspondence : . (1 - t) X + t
s (x, (1 " t)
V
+ t y)
is a well defined fiinction between '
([p, 1))· and Ρ χ
([0, l)).
It is a homeomorphism, in fact. But it fails to be in any sense polyhedral, since it maps, in general, line segments into curved lines. Example: Taking Ρ to be an interval, Q to be a point.
cca)^ The horizontal line segment corresponds to the part of a hyperbola under the above correspondence,. We can however find a polyhedral substitute for this homeomorphism. 4.3. β. Proposition. Let P> Q, oC J ^
be as above, let 0 <
< 1,
Then there is a polyhedral equivalence. -1
( CoA]
ρ χ pr' (
)
which is consistant with the projection onto the interval [^0, Tj « Proof: Let ^
and
be simplicial presentations of Ρ
and take the simplicial presentation ^ of
Lo. t] ·
='
ί·£Τ] f
and Q )
64
Gonsider the set of all sets of the forai A( ^ > ^ , i)> where Ρ ζ(ρ , Γ ζ Ο
J i £^
and Γ = 0 iff 1 = [O] , defined -thus:
A( p , 0 , 0 ) = f Mp
i ) = f ^ O d f ^ (i)
The set of all these A( f , 6Γ , i), call it 01- . It is claimed that C5l is a regular presentation of that A( ρ , er", i)^ A( p',
iO
)> and
if and only if
i^i'.
Secondly, consider the set of all sets of the form B( Ρ ,
. i) where ρ ^ (p
, (f e 6 ^ ^ ^ ί ^ and 6" = 0 if i =
defined thus:
B( F , 0 , 0) = Ρ B(f
£Y}
i) = f X^( trfvjrxp"' (i))
It is claimed -chat (j2) of all such B( Ρ ,
i) . is a
regular presentation of Ρ /<s 12)"'([o, ^J), and that B(f,r,i)4
B( p', r', i') if and only if (Γ-4 β-
f'
and i 4 i'. Hence the corrsspondence is a combinatorial equivalence Tj and-^ of 0Land(j3
Β( ,·ρ ,
, i)
"'^(jh . If we choose the centerings
respectively such that
oC ( η(Α( f and
A( p , (f, i)
p)(2 nd coordinate of
(c, τ ))) = (B( -p , βΤ , (0, Τ ))) =
The induced simplicial isomorphism d((jU,^rj ) a polyhedral equivalence consistent vd.th the projection onto
)
Ρ X
) gives fj )ν
,Γο^ 'Τ J .
It should perhaps be remarked that by choosing ^
and
65
fine enough, our equivalence is arbitrarily close to the correspondence (*) on page 6?. Ο 4.3« 9. Corollary. Let C(F) be the cone on Ρ with vertex v, and : C(P) any
^ [0, lj be the join of Ρ
ζ· (0,· l),
Ρ >· [ρ,
) is polyhedrally equivalent to
by an eqiiivalence consistent with the projection For, take Q = ν in 4·3-8.
4.3.10. Corollary. Let J^ P-^
^ 0," ν — ) ί. Then for
0, Q — ^
^
? *
[o,. l] be the join of
1 ; let 0 < Y <
1. Then
is polyhedrally equivalent to P·^ Q
, S3 by an equivalence
consistent with the projection to Ijy^ , For, by 4.3.8, where p> : C(Q) By 4.3.9, interchanging
β
)
j J ^ Ο
)
· Ρ X
^^ ^^e join of Q
) >1
0 and 1, we see that
and vertex
> 0,,
(i^V [Y ,
combining these and noting the preservation of projection on ^"V^ ,
0; ,
we have the desired result. [~\ 4.3. t1. Definition. Let Κ be a polyhedron and χ ζ; K. Then a subpolyhedron L of Κ is a said to be a (polyhedral) link of X
in K, if L * X is defined, is contained in K, and is a
neighbourhood of χ in K. A (polyhedral) star of χ in Κ is the cone with vertex X
on any link of χ in K. Clearly, if a ζ. K^ C
^^^^
is a, neighbourhood of * a'
in K, then L<;3 ^^ is a link of ' a ' in K,^., if and only if it is a link of' a ' in K.
66
To show that links and stars exist, we triangulate Κ by a simplicial presentation
with χ as a vertex. Then |
is a link of χ in K, and
St(x,/i
In this case
)\
is a star of χ in K.
St(x, Λ )1- Lk(x,/J )\ is open in K; this need not
be true for general links and stars. Ex. 4.3.12. If ^ G 6" 6 4
is any simplicial presentation of K, and
J then
and
* Lk(
{b 6"} ,Λ )
Ex. 4.3. ^2'.
(a) Let
as in 4.2.1, if χ ^ A, ^ A ·«· | Λ D
f :Κ
κ' be a one-to-one polyhedral map,
simplicial with reference to presentations K'. Then 'for any ^ ^ /ζ , χ f f f
is a link of χ in K,
is a star of χ in K.
(b) With £a, is a link of χ in K.
Lk( tr , Λ )
and
' of Κ and
^
\β·] * Lk(
Λ )1
Lk(
)|
is the join of and
X—>f(x).
Formulate and prove a more general statement using 4.1.16 (b) With the hypothesis of 4.2.15, if A^ is a 0-cell
of ^ and f
,
) C I^AQI
A(fAQ)
is the join of A^
> fCA^)
and f
•
If χ and a are two distinct points in a vector space, the set of points (l - t ) x + t a , t ^ O
will be called 'the ray
from X through a'. Let L^
and L2 be two links of χ in k, then for each
point a t Lp the ray through a from χ intersects L2 in a unique point h(a) (and every point In L2 is such a image). It
67
intersects L2 in atmost one point, since the cone on L^ with vertex χ exists. It intersects L2 in at least one point since the cone on L2 must contain a neighbourhood of the vertex of the cone on L^.
^
The function h : L^
^ L2 thus defined is a homeomor-
phism. But, perhaps contrary to intution, it is not polyhedral. The graph of the hiap h in this simple case is a segement of a h3φerbola. The fallacy of believing h is polyhedral is old (See, Alexander "The combinatorial theory of complexes", Annals of Mathematics, 31, 1930); for this reason we shall call h the standard mistake after Zeeman (see Chapter I of "Seminar on Combinatorial Topology"). We shall show how to approximate it very well by polyhedral equivalences. It migh be remarked that the standard mistake is "piecewise projective", the category of such maps has been studies by N.H. Kuiper /"see "on the Smoothings of Triangulated and combinatorial Manifolds" in "Differential and combinatorial Topology"^
A symposium in Honor
of Marston Morse,Edited by S,S. Cairns_7. 4.3·
Definition. Let A and Β be two convex sets.
one function from A onto B, linear; if for each a^, a^ f A,
cL i ^ ••-
A one-to-
Β is said to be quasi-
(["a^, a^ ) ^ j^(a^),
In other words, J^ preserves line segments. It is easy
68
to see that cL
is also quasi-linear.
Example i Any homeomorphism of an interval is quasi-linear.
In
,
the map;
as a map from A = ^ (r^, r^) Β = -^(Λ^,
0 <
< ,
^^y
to
quasi-linear. Q
4.3.14. Proposition. Let cC · ^ — ^
Β be quasi-linear. Let
a^l be an independent set of .points in A, defining an open simplex ^
. Then • cLi^o) }···>
and the simplex they define is of 6~ if and only if
is independent,
( C" )· Consequently
eC ( Τ ) is a face of
The proof is by induction. definition.
(Sj^) \
is a face
dL ( ΙΤ)·
For η = 1, this is the
The inductive step follows- by writing
and noting that quasi-linear map preserves joins,
=
1
Π
4.3.15. Theorem. Let L^ and L^ be two links of χ in Κ with h : L^—^
Lg, the standard mistake. Suppose
polyhedral presentations of L^ and L^. Then there exist simplicial refinements
1
and
h(^) ^ f :L — ^
L
2
of ^ ^
^ and h
^
1
and ^ ^
2
such that for each
is quasi-linear. If
is defined as the linear extension of h restricted
to the vertices of /ή ^, then f is a polyhedral equivalence simplicial with respect to =
^ and
^ and such that
for
Proof; We can suppose that ^ ^ ^ and
simplicial, and find
69
a simplicial presentation ^D of (L^"'^ x (Si^^fe]]
)· Define Λ
that every simplex
^
= Lk(x,(p ). It is clear
is contained in tT
and hence the standard mistake h^ :
)C J
—^
>
L^ takes
to
· • The restriction of h^ to
let
Lg* x ) refining
ζ; ^
55-
; the three points
is quasi-linear. For,
a^, a^, χ determine a plane
and in that plane an angi^ar region ^
, which is the union of all
rays from χ through the points of • by definition, takes Pa , a Γ ^ • 1 2-J geometrically obvious, is just
· to L.
standard mistake, X
, which, it is
h^(a^), h^Cag)^.
This, "together with 4.3. 14, enables us to define I=
tr )
C" t A '·
presentation refining ^
, and to see that this is' a simplicial
.
Similarly, via the standard mistake h^ ί | Λ
—^
L,
we have
Λ
2
Since, clearly, h 5 L^
L^ is h^ · h^
and the
composition and inverse of quasi-linear maps are again quasi-linear, the major part of the theorem is proved. The last remark about f is obvious.
Q
4.3. t6. If in 4.3.15, for a subpolyhedron K* of L^, h^K' is polyhedral, then we can arrange for f : L ^
y Lg of the theorem
.1 = h to be such that f | K'
I K. For, all we need to do is to assure that
has a
70
subpresentation covering Κ; then because h is linear on each simplex in K, the resultant 4.3.17. Corollary.
f is identical with h there. D
Links (resp. stars) of χ in Κ exist and
all are all polyhedrally equivalent. 4.3-1 β. Proposition. If
D
f : Ρ — ^ Q is a polyhedral equivalence, ,
then any link of χ in F is polyhedrally equivalent to any link of X in Q. For'triangulate are obviously isomorphic.
f, and look at the simplicial links; they Q
4.3.1?· allows to define the local dimension of polyhedron Κ• at x. This is defined to be the dimension of any star of χ in K. By c
4.3.17 this is well defined. It can be easily seen that (by 4.3.12) the closure of the set of points where the local dimension is ρ is a subpolyhedron of K, for any integer p. We will next consider links and stars in products and joins. Ex. 4.3.19. Let C(P) and C(Q) be cones with vertices ν and w. Let Ζ = (P
(Q)) U (C(P)% Q). Then
(a) C(P)
C(Q) = C(Z), the cone on Ζ with
vertex (v, w) (b) Ρ y. w and ν X. Q are joinable, and (P A w) * (v KQ) is a linkf of (v, w) in C(Z). Hence by straightening our the standard mistake^ we get a polyhedral equivalence Ρ -^ί· Q C^i Z, which extends the canonical maps Ρ
^
71
and Q — ^
νQ.
Hint; It is enough to look at the following 2-dimensional picture for arbitrary ρ t P> q G- QJ
ν
(υ.ν) ih^)
Ex, 4.3.20. Prove that Ρ * Q 4.3.8. If
φ : Ρ * Q — ^ [^0, Q
(C(p) >. Q O P ^ C(q)) utilising is the join of Ρ — >
the equivalence can be chosen so that P><.C(Q) and Ex. 4.3.21.
C() ( [o,
[^/z ,· \] ) goes to C(P)
)
0, Q — ^ ^o
Q. U
(Links in products). If x ^ P, y t Q, then a link of
(x, y) in Ρ X Q is the join of a link of χ in Ρ and of y in Q.
a link
Q
The join of X to a polyhedron
consisting of
two points is called the suspension of X with vertices Xj and X2 and is denoted by S(X). Similarly K^^ order suspensions are defined. Ex. 4.3.22.
(Links in joins).
In Ρ * Q.
1,
72
1) Let J.L·Ρ * Q - (Ρ Ο
and let
X = (1-t) Ρ + t q, ρ ^ P, q e Qj 0 <; t < 1. If L^ is a link of ρ in P, L^ a link of q in % then p, q) is a link of χ in Ρ
L^) (with vertices
Q.
2) If ρ G P, and L is a link of ρ in P, then L * Q is a link of ρ in Ρ * Q. , Hint; for 1. Consider simplicial presentations (p and and Q having ρ and q as vertices. is a link of()(p, q) in (p in Ρ
Then Lk(p, ^p ) * Lk(q,
follows from this.
)
, by 4. 1. 11. Hence a link of χ
Q = • ^p, q^ * Lk(p,(p ) * Lk(q,(^)
Lk(p, (p) •»• Lk(q, (3^)
of Ρ
or the suspension of
with vertices ρ and q. The general case
Q
4.4. Polyhedral cells, spheres and Manifolds. In this section, we utilize links and stars to define polyhedral cells, spheres and manifolds and discuss their elementary properties. Let us go back to the open and closed (convex) cells discussed in 1.5. If A is an open cell, then the closed cell A is the cone over
A with vertex a, for any a ^ A,
4.4.1. Proposition! If A and Β are two open cells of the same dimension, then
A and ^ Β are polyhedrally equivalent. More-
over the equivalence can be chosen to map any given point χ of δ A 'onto any given point y of
B.
Proof; Let dim A = η = dim Β = η. Via, a linear isomorphism of the linear manifolds containing A and B, we can assume that A
73
and Β are in the same n-dimensional linear manifold, and moreover that A Λ Β / 0. Then
"^-A and
point of Α Λ Β
Hence 'b A and
in 'AljB.
Β are both links of any Β are polyhedrally
equivalent. A rotation of A will arrange for the standard mistake to map X to y. And 4.3.15, we can clearly arrange for χ and y to be vertices in
^ and
A
^
By joining the above map with a map of point of A to a point of B, we can extend it to a polyhedral equivalence of A and B. Thus any two closed cells are polyhedrally equivalent. 4.4.2. Definition»
A polyhedral n-sphere (or briefly an n-sphere)
is any polyhedron, polyhedrally equivalent to the boundary of an open cell of dimension • (n + l). By 4.4. 1 this is well defined. 4.4.3. Definition. A polyhedral n-cell (or briefly an n~cell) is any polyhedron, polyhedrally equivalent to a closed convex cell of dimension n. By the remark after 4.4.1, this is well defined. All the cells and spheres except the 0-sphere are connected. Consider the "standard n-cell", the closed n-simplex, and the "standard
(n-1)-sphere", the boundary of a n-simplex. By 4.1.8,
4.3. 1δ and 4.4.1, we have 4.4.4. Proposition. (n-1)-sphere.
The link of any point in an n-sphere is an
^
4.4.5. Corollary. An n-sphere is not polyhedrally equivalent to an (m)-sphere, if m ^ n.
74
Proof,: By looking at the links'iising 4.4.4·, and induction. 4.4.6. If f n-simplex of
^ C
D
is an equivalence of an n—cell with a closed
, we see that for points of C corresponding to points , the link in C is an (n-l)-cell; and for points of C
corresponding to points of ζΤ , the link in C ' is an (n-1)-sphere. 4.4.7. Proposition.
An n-sphere is not polyhedrally equivalent to
an n-cell. Proof; Again by induction.
For η = 0, a sphere has two points and
a cell has only one point. For η ^ 0, an n-cell has points which have (n-l)-cells as links, where as in a sphere all points have (n-1)-spheres as links. And so, by induction on η they are different.
D
This allows us to define boundary for arbitrary n-cells, namely the boundary of an n-cell C, is the set of all points of C whose links are (n-l)-cells.
We will denote this also by
^ C.
This coincides with the earlier definition for the boundary of a closed convex cell, and the boundary of a n-cell is an (n-1)-sphere. And as in 4.4.5, an n-cell and an (m)-cell are not polyhedrally equivalent if m / n. By taking a particularly convenient pairs of cells and sphere, the following proposition is easily proved: Ex. 4.4.β. Whenever they are defined, 1) The join a m-cell and an n-cell is a (m + η + l)-cell. 2) The join of a nir-cell and an n-sphere is a (m + η + 1)-cell.
75
3/ The join o? a m-sphero and an n-sphere is a (τη + η + O-sphere. If in (1) of 4,4. δ, C, '.^nd C^ are the cells, then Cg) =
CC^
of
the cell, and S the sphere 4.4.9. Definition.
if C is
υ (C ^t· S) - 5 C * S.
Q
A PL-manifold of dimension η (or a .
PL n-manifold) is a polyhedron Μ
such that for all points x ^ M,
the link of χ in Μ is either an (n-l)-cell or an (n-1)-sphere. 4.4.10. Definition.
If Μ is a PL n-manifold, then the boundary
of Μ denoted by ^ M, is defined to be
Μ =^χςΜ link of X in
Μ is a cell^ . Notation; If A is any subset of M, the interior of A and the boundary of A in the topology of M, vdll be denoted by int and bd ^ A respectively, Μ - ^ Μ
A
Μ is also usually called the 0
interior of M, this we vdll denote by int Μ
or M. Note that
int^ Μ = Μ, where as int M. = Μ - ^ M. It is clear fx-om the propositions above, the manifolds of different dimensions cannot be polyhedrally equivalent, of course, from Brouwer's theorem on the "Invariance of domain", it follows that they cannot even be homeomorphic. 4.4.11. Proposition.- If Μ is a PL n-manifold, then b Μ is a PL (n-1)-manifold, and
^ ( ^ M) = 0.
Proof: We first observe that Μ - ^ Μ is open in M, For if XfeΜ -
Μ, let L be a link of χ in M, S the corresponding
star, such that S - L is open in M.® S is a cell and
S = L.
76
If y t S _ L, then a link of y in S is a link of y in M, since S is a neighbo\irhood of y. y
Since S is a cell and
S - O S , the link of y in S is a (ίβϋ. Hence y £ Μ - Ο M,
for all y ζ· S - L or Μ
Μ is open in M. Hence
Μ is closed
in M. If then
is any simplicial presentation of Μ and
^J. * Lk( Γ ί
by 4.3. 12. Hence Γ C 0
) J· is a link of χ in Μ Μ
or
also is contained in ^ M, since ^ Μ uion of all such ^
L
X ^
for all χ ^
C Μ - c)M.
If
C ^
is-closed.
^ Μ being the
^
is a subpolyhedron of M.
Let X be a point of S-= L
ζ; ,
M, L a link of χ in Μ and
, the corresponding star such that S - L is open.
is an (n-l)-cell.
And by 4-4.8, S is an n-cell with
δ S ^ L O x ^^ ^ L. If y f X
^ L - 5 L C 3 - L, then a link of
y in S is a link of y in Μ as above. But a link of y in 3
is a cell, since y ζ. ^ S. Hence x-ii-^L-^ L C b M. Since
^ Μ is closed, χ * ^ L C ^ M, and since χ -if- L is a neighbourhood of X in b M, ^ L is a link of χ in ^ M. Hence a PL (n-1)-manifold without boundary. Remark;
Μ is
D
Thus, if χ f ^M, there exist links L of χ in Μ
(for example, the links obtained using simplicial presentations), such that
L C
and "b L a link of χ in ^ M. This need
notbe true for arbitrary links.
Also there exist links L of
X ^
^ Μ = ^ L. For example, take a
Μ
in M, such that L
regular presentation (p of Μ
in which χ is a vertex and take
77
4.4.12. Proposition. Let Μ be a PL n-manifold, and
a
simplicial presentation of M. If
CTC^^
or Μ -
ζ
, then either
M, and 0
I Lk( (i , Λ )1 is a (n-k-l)-cell if 6" C δ Μ
2)
Lk( ^ ,
is a (n-k-1 )^sphere if
Μ - £) Μ
where k is the dimension of (f Proof?
That
C ^ ^ or Μ
b Μ
is proved in 4.4.11.· The
proof of (1) and (2) is by induction on k. It k from definition. Lk(
If k> 0, let
0, this follows
be a (k-l)-face of
. Then
) = Lk(6·}^ Lk( C , Λ )), and
being the link of a point in fi" is either (n-l)-sphere or a (n-l)-cell. Hence, by induction, or sphere of dimension C δ
Lk( ^ ,
)
is either a cell
(n-l) - (k-l) - 1 = (n-k-l). If
Lk( 6~ , Λ )
cannot be a sphere, since then
is a cell. Hence | Lk( • ^ S'J ^i· Lk( 6"", Λ ) = b
would be a sphere.. Thus if ^ C 0
| L k ( ) j
Λ )! *
ζ"
is a (n-k-1 )-cell.
Similarly if 6" Q Μ - ^ M, | Lk( eT , Λ ) is a (n-k-1 )-sphere. Q Ex. 4.4.13.
(1) Let Μ be a PL m-manifold, and Ν a PL n-manifold.
Then My. Ν is a PI (m+n)-manifold and ^ (M V.N) is the union of ^MXNandMK^M. Hint! Use, 4.3.21
and 4.4.8.
(2) If Μ
Ν is defined, it is not a manifold except
for the three cases of 4.4.8. Hint; Use 4.3.22.
D.
^
78
k:k, 14. Proposition; (a) If f 5 S — ^ S' is a one-to-one polyhedral map of an n-sphere S into another n-sphere S', then f is onto. (b) If f ί C — ^ C
is a one-to-one polyhedral map of an
n-cell C into another n-cell C
such that f(b C)
C', then f
is onto. Proof of (a); By induction.
If η = 0, S has two points and the
proposition is trivial. Let η ^ 0. Let f be simplicial with respect to presentations
and
of S, X ζ. ζ- for some L, = L2 =
\[b
of S and S'. If χ is any point ^ /S
δ",
s^
(f 6Γ )] ^^ Lk(f
Since f is infective
,
Λ 2 ) 1 . and S^ = ||f
f maps L^
f L^ and χ — ^ f(x). L^ induction f L^ is biJactive.
Lk(f 0-, Λ
^ L^, and f S^ is the join of
and L^ are (n-1 )-spheres, and by Therefore
open in S'. Since S is compact is connected^
Consider
Hence f(S) is
f(S) is closed in S'. Since S
f(S) - S'. (b) is proved similarly.
^
By the same method, it .can be shovm Ex. 4.4.15. There is no one-to-one polyhedral map of an n-sphere into an n-cell.
D
Ex. 4.4.16. a) A PL-manifold cannot be imbedded in another PL-manifold of lower dimension. . b) If Μ and Ν are two connected manifolds of the same dimension, "b Ν If
0, and Β Μ = 0, then Μ
Ν is also empty, and if Μ
cannot be embedded in N.
can be embedded in Ν then Μ jai» N.
79
Ex. 4.4.17. a) If Μ ς Ν are two PL n-manifolds, then Μ - ^ Μ C Ν - ^ N, and Μ - ^ Μ is open in N. Hint; Use 4.4. 14 and 4.4, 15. In particular any polyhedral equivalence of Ν has to taken Ν - "δ Ν onto Ν - "δ Ν and h Ν onto ^ Ν. b) If M C N - ' ^ N , both Μ and N. PL (n)-manifolds, and X any point of ^ M, show that there exist links L of χ in M, such that a link of χ in Μ is an (n-l)-cell Dd L, and D α bM = 'b D. D Ex. 4.4. ie. In 4.2.14, show that if Ρ is a PL n-manifold is a PL (n-m)-manifold and ^ (f~\q))C^P.
Q
4.5. Recalling Homotopy Facts. Here we discuss some of the homotopy facts needed later. The reader is referred to any standard book on homotopy theory for the proof of these. 4: 5. 1. We define a space Ρ to be polyhedra Y C
with dim X
(k-1)-connected iff, for any
k, every. continuous map Y — ^ Ρ has
an extension to X. Thus, a ( -1)-connected polyhedron must just be non-empty. A k-connected polyhedron for k
can be anjrthing. For k
0,
it is necessary and sufficient that Ρ be non-empty and that ίΓ^(Ρ) = 0 for i ^ k. 4.5-2. A pair of spaces (A, B) where Β Q λ, is k-connected if for any polyhedra Y Q X with dim X ^ k, and f : X — ^ A such that i"(Y)C
"t^'^en f is homotopic to a map g, leaving Y fixed, sucW
that g(X)Q B.
80
This is just the same as requiring that
B) = 0
for i 4 k. If A is contractible (or just (k-1)-connected) and (Aj B) is k-connected, then Β is (k-1)-connected. We shall have occasion to look at pairs of the form A - B), which we denoted briefly as (A, - B). The following discussion is designed to suggest how to prove a result on the connectivity of joins, which is well known from homotopy theory. U. 5.3. Let A^Q A, B^
B, and suppose
(A, - A^ ) is a-connected,
(B, - B^) is b-connected. Then (A X B, - A^
B^) is (a + b + 1)-
connected. Let Y C X, dim X$.a + b + 1, and
f:X — ^
A χ B, with
f(Y) Π A ^XB, = 0. We must now triangulate X finely by say /4 . Look at
so the two coordinates of f are homotopic, using homotopy extension, to get a map, still called
Because X - X^ has X^ f^ (Χο)Γ\Β, = 0
Β
2
1
f^ such that
as a deformation retract, we can first get
and then f~\A X Β ) is contained in X - X .
1 1
2
By changing, homotopically, only the first coordinate, we get f"' (A^XB^) = 0. To go more deeply into this sort of argument, see Blakers and Massey, "Homotopy groups of Triads" I, II, III", Annals of Mathematics Vol, 53, 55, 58. 4.5.4. If Ρ is (a-1 )-connected, Q is (b-1 )-connected, then Ρ
Q
81
is (a + b)-connected. For, let C(p), C(Q) be cones with vertices v, w. Then (C(P), - v) is a-connected, (C(Q), - w) is b-connected. Hence by 4.5.3, (C(P)
C(Q), - (v, w)) is (a + b + 1)-connected. By 4.3.19,
this pair is equivalent to (C (P * Q), - (v, w)). Hence Ρ (a + b)-connected.
Q is
For a direct proof of 4.5.4, see Milnor's "Con-
struction of Universal Bundles II (Annals of Mathematics, 1956, Vol.63). 4,5.5. The join of k non-empty polyhedra is (k-2)-connected. In particular
(k-l)-sphere is (k-2)-connected. The join of a (k-l)-
sphere and a a—connected polyhedron is (a+k)—connected. k
suspension
Thus a
(same as the join with a (k-1)-sphere; of a
connected polyhedron is at least k-connected.
82
Chapter V General Position We intend to study PL-manifolds is some detail. There are certain basic techniques which have been developed for this purpose, one of which is called "general position".
i\n example is the assertion
that "if Κ is a complex of dimension k, Μ a PL-manifold of dimension > 2 k, and f : Κ
^ Μ
is any map, then f can be appro-
ximated by imbeddings". More generally we start with some notions "a map f ,: Κ
^M
being generic" and "a map f : Κ — ^^ Μ being in
"generic position" with respect to some Y (_ M**. This "generic" will be usually with reference to some minimum possible dimensionality of "intersections", "self intersections" and "nicety of intersections". The problem of general position is to define useful generic things, and then try to approximate nongeneric maps by generic ones for as large a class of X's, Y's and M's as possible (even in the case of PL-manifolds, one finds it necessary to prove general position theorems for arbitrary K). It seems that the first step in approximating a map by such nice maps is to approximate by a so called nondegenerat'e map, that is a map
f ! Κ — ^ Μ which preserves dimensions of subpolyhedra. Now it happens that a good deal of 'general position' can
be obtained from just this nondegeneracy, that is if Y is the sort of polyhedron in which maps from polyhedra of dimension ^
some η
can be approximate by nondegenerate maps, then they can be approximated
83
by nicer maps also. And the class of these Y's is much larger than that of PL-manifolds. We call such spaces Non Degenerate
(n)-spaces or
ND(n) -spaces. The aim of this chapter is to obtain a good description of such spaces and prove a few general position theorems for these spaces. 5.1. Nondegeneracy. 5.1.1. Proposition. The following conditions on a polyhedral map f JΡ— y
Q are equivalent! (a) For every subpolyhedron X of P, dim f(X) = dim X. (b) For every subpolyhedron Y dim f"^(Y)
of Q,
dim Y.
(c) For every point χ ^ Q, f ^(x) is finite. (d) For every line segment
, χ / j,
f([x, yj) contains more than one point. (e) For every φ ,
with respect to which f
is simplicial, f(
> ^
·
(f) There exists a presentation Q
of p, on
each cell of which f is linear, and one-to-one. Proof{
Clearly (a)
(d)
(b)
(c) ^
(e)
(f)
(d)
84
To see that (a) — ^ (b) : Consider a subpolyhedron Y of Q; then, f Dim (Γ\Υ)) = dim f (f"^(Y)) by (a) and as f (f"VY))CY, dim f (rkl)) ^dim Y. Hence dim (Γ'(Υ) 4 dim Y. To see the (d) Let CP 6 (p · li" that of
(c): ίΤ) has not the same dimension as
, two different vertices of Q"" say v^ and v^ are mapped
onto the same vertex of f( ίΤ") say v. Then ^v^, v^^ is mapped onto a single point v, contradicting (d), Finally (f)
(a):
To see this^ first observe that if f is linear and oneto-one- on a cell C, then it is linear one one-to-one on C also. Thus if A is a polyhedron in G, dim f(A) = dim A. But, X = U
(X Π C), and dim X = Max (dim X Λ c). It follows that
dim f(X) = dim X. Thus we have
t
and therefore all the conditions are equivalent. 5>t.2. Definition. We shall call a polyhedral map f which satisfies any of the six equivalent conditions of proposition 5.1.1. a nondegenerate map.
85
Note that a nondegenerate map may have various "foldings"; in other words it need not be a local embedding. Ex. 5.1.3. ( 0 Ρ
If f : Ρ
·•· yPj^j
Q is a polyhedral map, and
is a subpolyhedron of P, 1 4 i ^ k, and if
f /P^ is nondegenerate, then f is nondegenerate. (2) If f : Ρ — y
Q is nondegenerate, and X C Ρ a
subpolyhedron, then f / X is also nondegenerate. \ /"Hint : Use U C j .
0
Ex. 5.1.^. Proposition. The composition of two nondegenerate maps is a nondegenerate map.
Q
Ex. 5.1.5. Proposition. If f ; P^ — ^ nondegenerate, then f * g
P^
P^
Q^, and g : P^ — Q ^
are
^ Q * Q^ is nondegenerate.
In particular conical extensions of nondegenerate maps are again nondegenerate. /~Hint.5 Consider presentations with respect to which f, g are simplicial and use Let f : Ρ — ^
1, f_J7,
Ο
Q be a polyhedral map,
and
tri-
angulations of Ρ and Q with reference to which f is simplicial. and ^
^
as usual denote the k^^ skeletons of J^ a n d ^ ..
Let 0 , T| be centerings of
,
f(e ^ ) - ^(f δ") for
- Let
respectively such that /J^
and ^^^ denote
the dual skeletons with respect to these centerings. Then Ex. 5.1.6,.
f is nondegenerate if and only if f
^
C '
86
(b) f is nondegenerate if and only if
'(c) Formulate and prove the analogues of (a) and (b) for regular presentations. 5.2. ND (n)-spaces. Definition and Elementary properties. 5'.2.1. Definition. (read Non-Degenerate
A polyhedron Μ is said to be an ND (n)-space (n)-space) if and only if}
for every polyhedron X of dimension ^ n, and any map f t X — ^ Μ and any ^ ^
0, there is an ^ -approximation to f
which is nondegenerate. This property is a polyhedral invariant: •5.2.2. Proposition.
If Μ is and ND (n)-space, and
oC ' Μ — ^ M'
a polyhedral equivalence, then m' is also ND (n). Proof; Obvious.
pj
Before we proceed further, it would be nice to know such spaces exist. Here is an exampl; 5.2.3. Proposition. ' An n-cell is an ND (n)-space. Proof;
By 5.2.2, it is enough to prove for A, where A is an open
convex n-csll in
. Let f ;X — ^
A be any map from a poly-
hedron X of dimension ^ n. First choose a triangulation X, such that f is linear on each simplex of be the vertices of so that f'(v )
of
, Let
ν
. First we ' alter the map f a little to a f' f'(v )
are all in A = Interior of I.
This
7
is clearly possible? We just have to choose points near f(vj_)'s in the interior and extend linearly. Next, by 1.2.12 of Chapter I, we can choose' y
y 1
so that y r
is near f'(v.) and y 's are 1 1
1
in general position, that is any (n + 1) or less number of points of y's is Independent.
If we choose y's near enough f'(v^)'s, the
y's will be still in A, that is why we shifted interior. Now we define of
= y^
to a get a map X
f(v^)'s into the
and extend linearly on simplexes
^ M, which is non-degenerate by 5.1.1 (f).
And surely if f(v_) and y. are near enough, g will be good approximation to f.
Ο
The next proposition says, roughly, that an ND (n)-space is locally ND (n). 5.2.4. Proposition.
If
is any simplicial presentation of an
ND (n)-space, and 6 Λ ^ then j[St(6r,y^ ) is an ND (n)-space. Proof; If χ is a point of β' , then ( St( ) is a cone with vertex χ and base
lLk(
M; and
St(6",A
f :X
>\st( 6", Λ )
^
η and ^ >
so that f'(X) Q
f
which is a link of χ in
Lk(€~,A))
is open in M. If
is any map from a polyhedron X of dimension
0, we first shink it towards χ by a map f St(
(f, f') <
Now Ν
-
^ 6~ ^jlkC cr.
Μ
is a subpolyhedron of M, and Ρ (f'(X), N) >
)
say
so that
)| - ό 6Γ * (Lk( ζ-, Λ )] ί'(Χ)Γ\Ν = 0. Therefore
^ 0. Let T| = min( ^ , € /2). Since Μ is ND (n),
we can obtain an ^
-approximation to
nonde gene rate, g is an ^
f', say g which is
-approximation to f and g(X) Γ\ Ν = 0,
88
g(X)r Μ, Therefore is
an
N D
g(X) C
)j . Hence I St(r ,Λ )|
(n)-spaGe.
Next we establish a sort of "general position" theorem for ND (n)-space. 5.2·. 5. Theorem. Let Μ be an ND (n)-space, Κ a subpolyhedron of Μ of dimension ^ k. Let
f :X
^M
be a map from a polyhedron X
of dimension. ^ η ^ k — 1. Then f csn be approxiniated. by a nicLp Λ
g !X
^ Μ such that g(X) ΓΝ Κ = 0.
Proof! Let D be a (k + 1 )-cell. Let
f' s D
^ Μ be the
composition of the projection D X X — > X and f, that is f'(a, x) = f(x) for a 'r D, X e X. By hypothesis, dim (D ><X) ^ n. I
Hence f
can be approximated by a map g
The dimension of g'-^(K) ^ k. Consider
which is nondegenerate. ΓΓ (g'~^(K)); (where Π" i®
the projection D A X — > D), this has dimension ^ k; hence it cannot be all of the (k + 1 )-dimensional D. Choose some a ^ D Then g' (aV.X)nK - 0 . X ζ; X. Since
iV(g'~^(K)).
We define g by, g(x) = g'(a, x), for
f(x) = f'(a, x), and g' can be chosen to be as close
to f' as we like, we can get a g as close to f as we like.
Ο
We can draw a few corollaries, by applsdng the earlier approximation theorems. Ex. 5.2.6.
If Μ is ND (n), Κ a subpolyhedron of Μ of dimension
^ k, then the pair (M, Μ - Κ) is (η - k - 1)-connected. /"Hint! It is enou^ to consider maps
f s (D, ^ D)
^ (M, Μ - Κ),
and show that such an f is homotopic to a map g by a homotopy which is fixed on ^ D, and with g(D)
Μ ~ K. First, by 5.2.5, one can
89
get a very close approximation g^ to f with since g^ ^^D and f j^D
Μ - K. Then
are very close, there will be a small
homotopy h (3.2.3) in a compact polyhedron in M - Κ with hQ = f
D, h^ = g^ 6 D, Expressing D as the identification space
of b D X. I and D, (a cell with
^ D^ = b D X l) at ^ D X 1 t and patching up h and the equivalent of g on D , we get a map
J g : D — ^ M, with g j^D = f
^ D, g(D)(2 Μ - Κ and g close
to f. Then there will a homotopy of f and g fixed on
DJ7.
As an application this and 5.2.4 we have: 5.2.7. Proposition. If ND (n)-spaGe and Σ- Ζ.
is a simplicial presentation of an , then |LK( ζ" , Λ )
IS (η - dim ^ -2)~
connected. Proof: For by 5.2.4,
IS
|pt(5-,/i)| is |st( ^ , Λ )| - ? j i
ND (η), and by 5.2.6,
(n - dim ΰ" - 1 )-connected, thus giving that St( t5" , ) - ^ (n - dim C - 2)-connected, But Lk( ) is a deformation retract of
st(
A) -
C
is
π
5.3. Characterisations of ND (n)-5paces. We now introduce two more properties: the first an inductively defined local property called A(n) and the second a property of simplicial presentations called B(n) and which is satisfied by the simplicial presentations of ND (n)-spaces.
It turns out
that if Μ is a polyhedron and / 4 a simplicial presentation of M, then Μ is A(n) if and ohly if
is B(n).
Finally, we complete
the circle by showing that A(n)-space have an approxima,tion property
90
which is somewhat stronger than that assumed for ND (n)-spaces. A(n) shows that ND (n) is a local property. B(n) is useful in checking whether a given polyhedron is ND (n) or not. Using these, some more descriptions and properties of ND (n)-spaces can be given.. 5.3.1. Definition
(The property A(n) for polyhedra).
Any polyhedron is A(0). If η ^ 1 , a polyhedron Μ
is A(n) if and only if the
link of every point in Μ is a (n - 2)-connected 5.3.2. Definition.
(The property B(n) for simplicial presentations),
A simplicial presentation every fT
Ji ,
A(n - l),
Lk( f ,
)
is B(n), if and only if for
is (n - dim tT - 2)-connected.
By 5.2.7i we have 5.3.3. Proposition. If Μ is ND (n), then every simplicial presentation
of Μ is B(n).
Q
The next to propositions show that A(n) and B(n) are equivalent (ignoring logical difficulties), /
5.3.4. Proposition. If Μ is A(n,),' then every simplicial presentation of Μ is B(n). Proof! The proof is by induction on n. For η = 0, the B(n) condition says that certain sets are (^ - 2)-conhected,.i.e, any X is B(0), agreeing with the fact that any Μ is A(0). Let n ^ 0, and assume the proposition for m Let|A|c)M,rt4and dim C
n. = k. f
If k = 0, then by the condition A(n), the link of the element of Q"" , which can be taken to be | Lk(
, A)
IS
91
(η - 2)-connected. If k ^ Ο, let X be any point of if . Then a link of χ in Μ is
^ (Γ ^|Lk(
)j / which is A(n-l) by hypothesis.
Hence by inductive hypothesis, it^ simplicial presentation ^ ^ L k ( ^ , y^j ) satisfies B(n-l). If face of ^
is any (k-1 )-dimensional
, = (LkCT , [ ό ψ Lk(
which is ((n-l) - (k-l) - 2)-connected ) is B(n-l). 5.3»
Proposition.
))
i.e. (n-k-2)-connected since
•
If a polyhedron Μ
has a simplicial
presen-
tation which is B(n), then Μ is A(n). Λ Proof: The proof is again by induction.
For η = 0, it is the same
as in the previous case. And assume the proposition to be true for all m < η > 0. Let X ξ Μ.
^hen χ belongs to some simplex ίΤ" of /f ,
and a link of χ in Μ is ^ ^ ^ Lk( ίΤ , Λ ) ^ . We must show that this is an (n - 2)-connected A(n-l), As per connectivity, we note (setting k = dim ^
is a (k - l)-sphere; and by B(n), Lk( tT"» Λ )
connected.
) that is (n-k-2)-
As the join with a (k-l)-sphere rises connectivity by
k, ό Γ * Lk( 4 ) is (n-2)-connected. To prove that ^ ^ * Lk( )1 I enough to show that
Lk(, Λ )=
is A n-l
it is
' say is B(n-1); for
then by induction it would follow that
' = ^
* Lk( €Γ ,Λ ) |
is A(n-l). Take a typical simplex oC
/!'· It is of the form
92
p>V
, β C-
,/
Lk( Γ Λ
possible. Now Lk( ^ ,
), with
Pi or V
^ Lk( p, , {5-Γ] ) ^ Lk( V , Lk(
Let a, b, c be the dimensions of pectively.
a
Lk( p, ,
= 0 being
>.
/J )).
, V' res-
b + c + 1. Remember that dim g" = k. Therefore )
is a (k - b - 2)-sphere.
Lk(V , Lk(tr, /5))| =(Lk( V ^
,
Now^
) I ; and
by B(n)
assumption, this is (n - (c + k + 1) - 2) connected. Hence the join of
Lk(p>,
)
Lk( Y' , Lk( (Γ , Λ )) 1 which is
and
Lk(X , Λ') IS
(n - (c + k + l) - 2) + (k - b -
2) +1
-connected
that is ((n - 1) - a - 2)-connected. Thus
is B(n-l), and therefore by induction )l
a link of χ in Μ is a (n-2)-connected
A(n-1). Hence Μ is A(n).
0
We need the follovdng proposition for the next theorem. 5.3.6. Proposition. Let ^
be a regular presentation of an
A(n)-space Μ and V| be any centering of ^ . Let' A_ be any element of Ip , and dim A ^ k. Then ^ A
is an (n - k - 2)-connected
is a contractible A h-k' Proof; We know that ^ A is the link of a k-simplex in and
Since d ^
satisfies B(n), If k = 0,
Xk
^A
^ ·
is (n-k-2)-connected.
is the link of a point and therefore
A(n-l), since Μ is A(n). k > 0, then ^ A * \/\ A
is a link of a point in M,
93
and so is A(n-1). Take a (k-1 )-simplex ^ of d ^ ^A
is Lk( ^ , d ^δ·^^·^
in
^ A; then
which (by induction on k), we know
to be' a presentation of an A((n-1) - (k-l) - l)-space. To prove that
| ί A ( is A(n-k), we prove that ο A is
B(n-k). Consider its vertex 7|A, then Lk( ^ A
is (n-k-2)-connected.
Lk( CTJ cf A)| simplex <Γΐ; = If
C (Lk(
For a simplex ^ A))
^ [ η a] ,
Lk(
,
A)
^ ^ A, we have
which is contractible. For a
^
Cf , ff A) = Lk(
has dimension t, ^has dimension
A(n-k-l), Lk( Γ > Ά
A, ^A) =' ^^ A, and
(t-l); and so
A)( is ((n-k-l) - (t-l) - 2)-connected, i.e.
Q
5.3»7. Theorem. Let Μ be an A(n)-3pace, Y
degenerate. f
k\ being
is ((n-k) - t - 2)-connected. This shows that ζ k
satisfies B(n-k).
dimension . ^
Λ A).
n, and f t X —— ^ Μ Given any
ξ
X polyhedra of
a map such that f Y is non-
0, there is an
^ -approximation g to
such that g is nondegenerate and g | Y = f Y.
Proof; The proof will be by induction on n. If η =
we take
g = f, since any map on a 0-dim.ensional polyhedron is nondegenerate. So assume η η to be true for all m
0, that the proposition with m instead of n.
Without loss of generality we can assume that hedral. Choose simplicial presentations ^ and Μ
Q
f is poly-
j'^TfX of Y?· X
such that f is simplicial with respect to
a n d j
such that the diameter of the star of each simplex in '•'llYC. is less than ζ
. Let β , 'Tj be centerings of
and^A^ with
and
94
f(Q
IT ) - η
εε
C ^ ^
every ^
(f-6") for all
6Λ
. Then clearly is less than ζ· for
and the diameter of \ 0 f .
Consider an arrangement A^
A^ of simplexes of '^Υΐΐ^
so that dim k^ - > dim A. Ι-ίΊ,, for 1 i < k. The crucial fact about such an arrangement is, for each i, (*) }\A, is the union of S A. for some j's less than i. We construct an inductive situation
such that
-1
(1)
...
U|iA.\)
(2) Y. . x.n Y (3) g, : X, - —^ M, a nondegenerate map (4) g. (f-'lcTAj) C l ^ A . j (5) g.
i-1
(6) g. Y. = f Y. 1
η
, , is the union of certain A^ s in the beginning, say A^ s
with i ^ i .
f-^^"") ch""
and
1 Λ " is 0-dimensional.
Hence f f (
···
we take this to be g
all the above properties are satisfied and we
have more than started the induction* that g.
) is already nondegenerate. If
Now let i > i, and suppose
is defined, that is we already have the situation
1-1
It follows from (4) and (5), that for j < i,
aJ ) into
I^A. .
^
.
95
Also this shows that if x ^ f
(^A.l) then both JI
and f(x) are in
, which has diameter <. ξ- , and so X is an ^ -approximation to f i-Γ There are now two cases. Case 1. —
dim A. ^ k 1, 1 7 Look at A.
a n d Y i ( Y n x ' ) U f ·-1 ^ ( \'},A.\).
x' - r^
Y Π X' and g. ^ on ^
This is a contractible
,
( (a
(
A(n-k). Let The m a p s
f on
agree where both are defined by
and are nondegenerate by h3φothesis and induction.
Hence patching them up we get a nondegenerate map f' ; γ' — Since S \ \ is contractible
f' can be extended to a map (still
denoted by f') of X' to
aJ . Since x' ς
and
dim x'^n-k,
A^ is A(n-k), there is a nondegenerate map f" : x' - — ^ |<S
such that f
Y' ^ f' Y' , by using the theorem for (n-k) < n~1.
We now define g^ to be g^ ^ on X^ ^ and f these two maps agree where both are defined, namely f \
on X ; )·
Thus g^ is well defined and is nondegenerate as both f" and g, ^ are nondegenerate.
And clearly all the six conditions of
are
satisfied. Case 2.
Dim A^ = 0. Let B. 1
onto A^.
Β be the vertices of s
which are mapped
Then
... Let X' =
0ΐ>3\
\Sb
96
χ' is of dimension ^ n-1, and contains
f ( ^A^^ ). Let
Y' = f ( ^A^ ). Here the important point to notice is, that Y H x ' C y'. This is because so f(Y Γ\Χ') C
f(Ynx')
f Y is nondegenerate: Y Π x' C
It is also in
I al5A.j. We first extend
g.
\ξ A^
SC^,
and therefore
|;\aJ. Y
to X
and then by conical
extension to Ϊ \ ^ A^ ). g^ ^ maps γ' into ^ A^ and is nondegenerate on Y . Since
is (n-2)-connected, and dim X^n-1,
can be extended to a map f' of x' into \ is also A(n-l). Hence by the inductive hypothesis we can approximate f' by a nondegenerate map f" such that f" γ· . f' Y' =.g • Y'. 1-1 Hence f is nondegenerate and maps , 1 4 j 4s ^ B^ into I ^ · We extend this to a map h^ : ^B^ | — ^ ^ A^ by mapping B. to A. and taking the join . h. 3 1 J is clearly nondegenerate. Since lis I α \<ί Β.λζ^ l^B ι ^ n s . Ιζ^ χ', J J . j j if j / j'j h^s agree whereever their domains of definition overlap. J
Similarly h. and g agree where both are defined. We now define J i-1 g· to be g on X and h on cfB Thus g. is defined ^ i-1 i-T j on
0
^~
i® nondegenerate
since g^ ^
and
h.'s are nondegenerate. It obviously satisfies conditions 1-5 of ^ J to see that it satisfies (6) also: Let ij" is any simplex of' d ^ in
, i
S Β , if Β is not a vertex of Q" there is nothing to prove; j J if B. is a vertex of, ^ , write ξΤ = -Γβ I -ς-' . Both h. and f J JJ J agree on and B. and on Τ both are joins, hence both are equal J
97
on
. Then (6) is also satisfied and we have the situation
· D i
This theorem shows in particular that ND (n) is a local property; and that ND(n)-spaces have stronger approximation property than is assumed for them. The following propositions, which depend on the computations of links are left as exercises, Ex. 5.3.8. Proposition. X is an (n-2)-connected
C(X) and S(X) are ND (n) if and only if ND (n-l). Ο
Thus the k^^ suspension of X Is ND (n) if and only if X is an (n-k-1)-connected Ex. 5.3·9. Proposition.
Let
Then X is ND (n) if and only ND (n-l) for each vertex ν of Ex. 5.3.10. Proposition. 1ΐ ND (n)-space, and the dual skeleton
k ^
ND (n-k)-space. be a simplicial presentation of X, Lk(v, Λ ) .
is (n-2)-connected
Ο
is a simplicial presentation of an
n, then the skeleton is ND (n-k),
^ is ND (k), and
0
Thus the class of ND (n)-spaces is much larger than the class of PL n-manifolds, which Incidentally are ND (n) by the B(n)-property. The resiiLts of this section can be summarised in the following proposition: 5.3.It, Proposition.
The following conditions on a polyhedron Μ are
equivalent; 1) Μ is ND (n) 2) Μ is A (n)
3) a simplicial presentation of Μ is B(n) 4) every simplicial presentation of Μ is B(n) 5) there exists a simplicial presentation Μ such that | L K ( V , i s for all r ^
of
(n-2)-connected
and dim ν = 0
6) Μ satisfies the approximation property of theorem 5.3.7. 7) M)( I is ND (n+1).
Q
5.4. Sinfflilarity Dimension. 5.4.1. Definitions and Remarks. Let Ρ and Μ be two polyhedra, dim Ρ = p, dim Μ = m, p.^ m, and f ί Ρ
Μ a nondegenerate map.
Ee define the singiilarity of f (or the 2-fold singularity of f) to be set^x £ P^f"' f(x) contains at least 2 points • , and denote it by S(f) or S^ (f). By triangulating f, it can be seen easily that S(f) is a finite union of open cells, so that S(f) is a subpolyhedron of p. Similarly, we define the r-fold singularity of f for to be the set ^ x It· Ρ |
f(x) contains at least r points ι This vdll
be denoted by S^ (f). As above S^ (f) is a finite union of open cells, so that S^ (f) is a subpolyhedron of P. Clearly S^ (f)^S^ (f))
•
and S^ (f) are empty after a certain stage; since f is nondegenerate. The number (m - p) is usually referred to as the codimension; and the number r(p) - (r-l)m, for
2 is called
the r-fold point dimension and is denoted by d^ (see e.g. Zeeman "Seminar on combinatorial Topology", Chapter Vl). Clearly d - d -(ήν-ρ), r r—i It will be convenient to use the notions of dimension and
99
imbedding in the follovdng cases: (l) dimension of k, where A is a union of open cells. In this case the dim.· A denotes the maximum of the dimensions of the open cells comprising
A and is the same as the
dimension of the polyhedron A. (2) Imbedding C is an open cell and Μ f
a polyhedron.
f of G ——^ M, when
This will be used only when
comes from a polyhedral embedding of C. In such a case f(C) will
be the union of a finite member of open cells.
And if A
Μ
is some
finite union of open cells, then f ^(A) will be finite union of open cells, and one can talk of its dimension etc., A nondegenerate map
f : Ρ ——^ Μ will be said to be In
general position if dim (S^ (f))^ d^
, {dL cJX ^V·
If ρ = m, this means nothing more than that
f is nondegenerate, so
usually ρ <_ m. 5.4.2. Proposition. Let ^ Ρ
such that for every C
be a regular presentation of a polyhedron j f C is an embedding. Let the cells
of ^p tie C^
C^ , arranged so that
dim C^ ^ dim
1 ^ i ^t,
and let P^, i ^ t be the sub-
polyhedron of Ρ whose presentation is , G^ ,·'·} G^^· Then i) SgifJPi) =
(f,|p._^)g|c. Af~Vf(P.Jj)]
r\f(c.))] ii) S^(f|Pi)
UiVi
(f|Pi_i)nf-Hf(c.))]
100
This is obvious»
If we write Ρ =
(compatible with
the definition of S^'s, then S^(f P^) would be -^Mst P^, and only (ii) be written (with r ^ 2) instead of (i) and (ii). The proposition is useful in inductive proofs. For example, to check that a nondegenerate
f is in general position, it is enough
check for each little cell C^, that dim C^O f~Vf(S^
V
If we have already checked upto the previous stage; since f is nondegenerate
f"^ f(S
(flp. )) will of dimension d , and then I f 1— 1 ^ 1J we will, have to verify that f C. intersects f (S , (f P.))) in 1 r-1 1 codimension 'X (mr-p) or that (C.) intersects f(S (fjP )) in 1 r-1 ' i codimension ^ m-p, (We usually say that A intersects Β in codimension q if dim (APl B) = dim Β - q. Similarly the expression Ά intersects Β in codimension^ q' is used to denote dim (A Π B) ^ dim Β - q). The aim of the next few propositions is to obtain presentations on which it would be possible to inductively change the map, so that
f(C^) will intersect the images of the previous
singularities in codimension ^ (m-p). Proposition 5.4.7 and 5.4.9 are ones we needj the others are auxilary to these. Ex. 5.4.3. Let A, B, C, be three open convex cells, such that A Π Β is a single point and C
A Ο B. Then dim C ^ dim A + dim B.
/"Hint; First observe that if A' and B' are any two intersecting open cells then L^^t L^i = L^i p^ g' j where manifold spanned by X. Applying this to the dim C = dim L. V dim L, , = dim L + dim C (A U B ) A = dim L, + dim A
L^ denotes the linear above situation L - dim (L Γ\ L ) Β A Β L - dim (L„· _ Β AΛ Β
101
= dim L, + dim L . since Α.Γ\ Β
A
Β
is a point^J'' 5.4.4. Proposition. Let A be an open convex cell of dimension n, and QL a regular presentation of A with A tC?-· If L is anylinear manifold such that dim L H A = ky^O, then there is a Β of dimension^ η - k, vdth Β Π L / 0. Further, if A' is any cell of
contained in ^ A, we can require that A' Λ Β = 0.
Proof; If k = 0, we can choose A itself to be B. If k > 0, consider the regular presentation^ C
Π
C
C Π L Gα L
0,
have more than one 0-cell. Choose one of
these 0-cells of C. 'It must be the form Β Π L for some Β We >rould;iike to apply 5.4.2, for B, L A A L A A do not intersect.
and A. But Β and
Since we are interested in the dimension
of B, the situation can be remedied as follows! Let D be an n-cell, such that A Q Ό. L Γ\ D .is again k-dimensional. Since B<2 D, B O L C D Γ\ L, and as Β Ο ^ is nonempty, Β and D Π L intersect. Β
(D Π L) cannot be more than one point since
Bri(DnL)^]'BnL
which is just a point. Applying 5.4.2 to B, D O L and D we have η = dim D ^ dim Β + dim (D Λ L) = dim Β + k, or, dim Β ^ η - k. To see the additional remark, observe that all the vertices of
cannot be in A', for then L Π
A', _,contrary to the
hypothesis that L Π A is nonempty. Hence we can choose a 0-cell Β Π Lj Β ^ 0 \ of Β η A' = 0.
not in A'. Since OV is a regular presentation
Π
This just means that if. L does not intersect the cells of
102
QV. οί dim ^
, then dimension of the intersection is
η -i ,
or codimension of intersection is > !L . Using the second remark of 5.4.4. we have: 5.4.5.
Corollary. Let (p be a regialar presentation, containing a full
subpresentation ^ (which may be empty). Let
(p
=
dim C^ k
If L is any linear manifold which does not intersect ^ , then ^ Κ dim (L π ( (Ρ - O^) 4 η - k where η = dim ((J) - <3»). CX 5.4.6. Proposition. Let ^ A be a closed convex cell of dimension ^
k + q, let S be a (k-1)-sphere in ^ A s and B^ >··., B^ be a
finite number of open convex cells of dimension / q - 1 contained in the interior of A. Further, let
be a simplicial presentation
of S. Then there is an open dense set U of interior A if a ^ U, <5^ ^ ^ , then the linear manifold L, ( by
such that
. generated , a;
'a' does not intersect any of the B^'s.
Proof; For any {ρζ.
, consider the linear manifolds L
generated by CT and B., ^ Hence U = int A - {J ^ i int A. If a is any point ^ intersect any of the B.'sj
for
( (Γ > i < r. Dim L. ^ k+q-1. ^ V
L. C cr ί of U ^ , then L
does not . ( ^ , a) for if there were a B. with
3 L. OB. / 0, let b ^ L, ,ΠΒ·· L r L and (σ-, a) J a^ J («Γ, b ) ^ ((T , a) is of the same dimension, as L, ,, since b Is in the interior of A, Thus a t L vC L ( (Γ , a) contrary to the choice of (
t1 «ν β
» "U
satisfies our
103
5.4.7. Proposition. Let ^
be a closed convex cell of dimension
k + q, let S be a (k-l)-sphere contained in ^ A, and let
• Β W '
Β • be a finite number of open convex cells in int A. ΓJ
Then there is an open dense subset U , of int A such that if a ζ U, then S Proof; Let
a intersects each of the B/S
in codimension ^ q.
be some simplicial presentation of S. First let us
consider one B^. Let ^
^ be a regular presentation of B7
containing a full subpresentation ^ . covering B7 Γ)0^· Let (B - X J "iini q-l]. By 5.4.6, there is an open ^ i 1 J dense subset of int A say U^ such that if a ^ U^, 6" ζ; , then ^ intersect any of the elements of (β . B y 5.4.5, V tj J a; q-1 dim L. -Ύα ) ^ ~ where n. = dim Β . Hence \ D > a; ^i ' i i 1 i dim (S ·«· a Π B_) ^ n^ - q. Therefore df we take U = u^, where U J
constructed as above for each of Β 's, then U, satisfies the J
requirements of the proposition. 5.4.β. Proposition. Let q-cell;
D
(f be a k-simplex,
a regular presentation of
an open dense subset U of ^ manifold L.
Proof; Let C
C Γ\
and a, does not intersect any 0 and dim C ^ q-1.
, with C A "J- = 0 and dim C ^ q-1. The linear
manifold L, __ , c;
has dimension
dimension k + q + 1. Therefore L^ ^ and so Un =
Then there exists
, such that if a € U, the linear
. spanned by ^
cell C ζ (p satisfying
* Δ.
a closed convex
- L,
.
^^ Π Δ
is open and dense in A
. ) has
dimension^ q-1 · Define U
104
to be the intersection of all the U . If C C of (p of dimension ^ q-1, C Π ^ = 0, ^ choose bt C r>L : since b fli ( a) y = dim L and so L = L ^^ > ( r , a) ( or J a L contrary to the choice
a ^ U, and there were some with L, C ^ 0, V ί a; , dim L· =k + 1 = ( b) i.e. L L h) (
5.4.9. Proposition. Let S be a :(p-1)-sphere, ^ q-cell, Ip a regiilar presentation of S •«• ^ 1) a regular refinement
^
a closed convex
. Then there exists
of ^^
2) a point a € Λ 3) a regular presentation ^
of S * a
such that a) ^
contains a fulL subpresentation
b) Each C i.
covering S,
i
is the intersection of a linear manifold with a (unique) cell E^ ^ (p', if C
C', E_ / Ε
c
and if C< c', then E^ < Ε '
c c
c) dim C < dim Ε - q, for all C ^ ^ C
-Λ .
Proof; Let 01 , (j^ be simplicial presentations of 3, ^'
be a common simplicial refinement of
; and let
* (Ji and ^
. Since
Q Y is full in Ol-* (B , there is a subpresentation, say (p
covering S. If ζ" ζ: (Jl, S" * Δ
, of
is covered by a subpresentation
in , hence there is a subpresentation of (p \ covering
*
subset U ^
of A ·
for
. Applying 5.4.8 to ^ ^ ^
say
(P^j— t
, we get an open dense
intersection of the sets U ^
QX, . Let a ^ U. Obviously
'a' is in an (open) q-simplex
105 1
of ' (p
contained in l\ , Hence
(gj , call it
'a' belongs to a q-simplex of
f .
We define ^
to be union of J^ ,
intersections of the form L ^ ^ It is clear that L,
a) ^
<Γ t Φ- ' ^
\ 0 ® =
Moreover
\^ 3 (F may be empty) since that ^
t (p "/C ·
EHS^F,
Ρ^Λ
I
is full in
p
. This immediately gives
is a regular presentation^ using the fact that
is the disjoint union of cells C
, and all nonempty
^A
(AO B)
B, A Γ\ ^B, ^A Γ\. ^B, for open convex
A, Β with A η Β 0. Moreover ^ is full in Qp·. If is of the form C = L Π Ε, we write Ε as Ε . By
A
(er, a)
c
definition each C ^ (j> is the intersection of Ε with a linear Λ C manifold, and if c'
2
is-.r e o L , Ε , Ε t(p C 1 ^ Ο2 ^ Ε C,
, 0 ill ^ a 1 2
Ε . If C2
6Γ
case Ep C 5*· f, 1 '
If 5- - Τ , and C ^ C , clearly 1 2
, then C 1
C ^ Ρ' ^ f defined in the first paragraph of I»
the proof). But C ^ and
^
Remark; In the above proposition of S * A
refining
cannot be equal to C . In this 2
are disjoint, hence E^ ^ ^c ' ^
^
can be taken any presentation
and adjoin presentation of S * Λ .
5.4. to. Proposition. Let Μ be an ND (n)-space. Let X
^
106
polyhedra such that Ρ
X U C, C a closed convex cell, and
Χ(Λ C = ^ C, and dim Ρ = ρ < n. Let f ; Ρ — ^ Μ be a map such that f / X is in general position.
Then there exists an arbitrary
close approximation g to f such /that g is in general position and g / X = f / X. Proof; If ρ = n, any nondegenerate approximation of f would do. So let ρ ^ n. In particular dim C ^ ρ ^ n. Step A. Let D be an
n)-dimr-cell containing ."^C in its
boundary, and such that 1) Ds'^C^^'A., /X a closed convex (n-p)-cell 2) Δ Π C is a single point of both C and
^
'd' in the interior
so that C = d * b C
3) Dr\ Ρ - C. This is clearly possible (upto polyhedral equivalence by considering Ρ
0 in V X. W, (where V is the vector space containing
P, W an (n-p)-dimensional vector space), and taking an (n-p)-cell Λ
through d
0 in d
of the identity on r : D —^
C. Thus
W, for some d ^ C ^ ^ C etc. . The join
C and the retraction Δ — ^ d gives a retraction (f/C) · r is an e^ctension of f/C. Since Μ is
an ND (n)-space, (f/C)» r can be approximated by a non-degenerage map, say h, such that h/
C = f/
C. Let us patch up f/X and h,
and let this be also called h; now h maps X U D = Ρ 0 D into Μ and is nondegenerate. Triangulate
h so that the triangulation of
X Ο D with reference to which h is simplicial contains a subpresentation ^
which refines a join presentation of
bc * A
. We
107
β. apply 5.4.9 now, ^
vdll be
(p ' there and we obtain, a point a ^ A >
a presentation (j^ (what vms called Q\ there) of ^ C * a. Each cell Β
of (3 not in
ζ) C, is the intersection of a unique Ε D a linear manifold, if b' < Β • then Ε / Ε and dim Β < Β Β Step Β. Let B^ ,,.., B^ be the elements of (p) not in ^ so that dim ^ dim for ' 1 i <; r. Let X^ = X U
of J^ vdth dim Ε - (n-p). Β C, arranged B^O ... UBj_ >
X. is a polyhedron. We define a sequence of embeddings J^ : X — ^ X UD, ^ i i such that 0
c£. X is the identity embedding of X in X U D
2) rL ^ is an extension of 3) 4) h X
is in general position. i
We shall construct the ^ ^ ' s vdth
one at a time begining
^ : X — } X yjD, the inclusion.
=
i®
general
position, and.»we can start the induction. Suppose JIj is already constructed. Then i-1 ^ dim S (h ) ^ d ; and by (2), (3), embeds 0 B. in Γ 1-1 r i_ t 1 C) Ε i Eg^.
; consider h""^ (h dC i-1
(S„ (h oG ))) intersected with ^ i-1
Since h is nondegenerate, these consists of a finite number
of open convex cells of dimension situation with q = n-p, A = Ε
d^. We apply 5.4.7 to this
.S=
( ^B.) and^B
B^
i_i
of 5.4.7 standing for the open cells of intersected with point in
say
for all r
1
^ ^
J
h~'(h «L (S (h dC )) i-1 ^ i-1
By 5.4.7, we can choose a
(a of 5.4.7) so that dG ^
^B^) * e^
108
intersects all these (i.e. The join of
|
for all r ^ 1) in codimension ^ (n-p). "^^P
^ point b^ of B^ to e^
gives the required extension on B^. Then dimj^^. B.r\h"^
'«^i-i
equivalently dim that is dim since h
is an extension of h ^^ i-1
1
Since Sr.i ( h ^ , )
- S^^^ (h
υ B.r\ (hc^.) u i s ^ (hoC.ix. L ^ 1' 1-1
1
(haC.) (B.)^ 1 1J
and since h
is already in general position, dim S ,(hdC )
can be chosen as close to f as we like is
£3
5.4.11. Theorem. Let Μ be an ND (n)-space, ^ C ^ polyhedra dim ρ ^ n
and
f jΡ—^M
a map such that f X is in general
position. Then there exists an arbitrary close approximation g to f such that g X = f X, and g is in general position. Proof: Let
be a regular presentation of Ρ with X
subpresentation
. Let
•="
covered by a
A"^ be arranged so
109
that dim A. 4 dim A.^, ,
^
Let P. =
Apply proposition 5.4.10 successively to (P , X ) 1 1
VJ A., X.= (P , X ). r, r
Thi^ requires the following comment: We must use our approximation theorem, which for Μ and 6 ^ 0
gives
) ^ 0, such
that for any Y 3 Z, h^ : Y ^ M,h2 : Ζ ^ M, if h2 is polyhedral, and h^ Ζ is a S { )-approximation to_ hg , then there is h^ : Y — ^ M, a polyhedral extension of h2 , which is an ^ -approximation to h^.' We want g to be an
t -approximation to f.
Denote f P. by f^. We start with g = f = f X. Suppose g 1 1 0 0 i-1 is defined on P. ^ such that g. ^ is in general position and is an f· . , approximation to f . Then we first extend g. to P, ^1-1 .1-1 1-1 i say f^' so that f^' is an ^ ^ approximation to f^ (this is possible since
, = 0 ( ^ i/2)) by the approximation theorem. Then we 1-1 I use 5.4.10 to get an ^ j_/2 s-PP^o^^^^tion g^ to . f. ' such that S. is in general position and g. 1 P. = g. g. is an ^ ~ 11-1 1-1 1 ^ ^-approximation to f^ and is in general position, g^ gives the required extension.
D
By the methods of 5.4.10, the following proposition can be provedJ $4.12. Proposition. Let Μ be ND (n); dim ρ ^ n, Ρ = X Ό C , where C is a closed p-cell, X Π C = δ C. Let f ! Ρ
Μ be
110
a map, such that f X is nondegenerate; and call dim X = x. Then J
there is a nondegenerate approximation g ί Ρ — ^ Mj arbitrarily close to f, such hat g I X = f X, and S(g) =
S(f|x)
plus (a finite number of open
• convex cells of dim ^Max (2p-n, p+x-n) Sketch of the proof! First we proceed as in Step k of 5.4.10. Now ρ = dim G. In Step B) instead of h) we write dim^B. Π
(h
(2ϊ>-η, p+x-n).
And in the proof instead of the mess before, we have only to bother about h h"^ (h =
(h cC (X )), intersected with Ε . i-1 i-1 Β i ^ (X. .)) = h"^ (h L . (X))Uh"^ (h dO (B U 1-1 1-1 1-1 ' i-1 1
(f(X))U
(h dC i-1
possibility of
..UB ) = i'l
(B \J ... U B )). Now the only 1 i-1
(f(X)) intersecting Eg^ is when
since h is simplicial. Since dim B^ ^ dim
E^Q
(f(X))
(r^-p)} it
already intersects in the right codimension. And the intersections with second set can be made minimal as before · Π 5.4.13. Theorem. Let Μ be ND ( n ) X C Ρ ; dim ρ ^ n, f ! Ρ — ^ a map such that f X is a map g ; Ρ
is an imbedding^
^ M, such that g
Then arbitrary close to f
X =f X
and calling
X = dim X, ρ = dim Ρ - X, dim S(g) ^ Max (2p - n, ρ + χ - n). Proof: This follows from 5-4.12, as 5.4.11 from 5.4.10.
Ο
This theorem is useful in proving the following embedding-
Μ
11
theorem for ND (n)-spaces. 5.4.14. Ρ
Theorem (Stated without proof). Let Μ be a ND (n)-space,
a polyhedron of dimension p ^ η - 3 and
connected map.
f :P—^ Μ
Then there is a polyhedron Q in Μ
homotopy equivalence
g :Ρ—
Q
a (2p-n+l)-
and a simple
such that the diagram
g Q inclusion N/ Μ is homotopy commutative.
•
The method of Step A in 5.4.10, gives; Proposition 5.4.15. Let Μ be an ND (n)-space, and Ρ a polyhedron of dimension ρ ^ η and presentation ^
of P,
f » Ρ — y Μ be any map. Then 3 a regular simplicial presentation^^TfC of Μ
arbitrary close approximation g to
and an
f such that, for each C
,
g (C) is a linear embedding, and g(C) is contained in a simplex of ^^tTCof dimension = dimension C + (n-p) and g( ^ C) = b Moreover -ΊΠΓζ. can be assumed to refine a given regular presentation of M. Also a relative version of 5.4.15 could be obtained, tS And from this and 5.4.13. 5.4.16. Theorem. Let
f :Ρ — ^
Μ be a map from a polyhedra Ρ of
dim - ρ into an ND (n)-space M, ρ ^ n, and let Y be a subpolyhedron of Μ
of dimension y. Then there exists an arbitrary close approximation
g to
f such that dim (g(P)a Y) ^ Ρ + y - n.
112
And a relative version of 5.4.16. X] 5.4.17. It should be remarked that the definition of 'general'position' in 5.4.1 is a definition of general position, and other definitions are possible^ and theorems, such as above can be proved. Here we formulate another definition and a theorem which can be proved by the methods of 5.4.10. ^^
A dimensional function d : P—^j^O, 1, ... J
^ function
defined on a polyhedron, with non-negative integer values, such that there is some regular presentation φ C t(p 5 X t
d (x)
dim C, and d is constant on C.
We say d^ If f 5 Ρ — function, and k^
of Ρ such that for all
if for all χ ζ-F, d, (x) ^ d2 (x). Μ
is a nondegenerate map, and d a dimensional
k^ non-negative integers, we define Sd (f; k^ ,.., kg) - 1
= f
m ςΜ
3 distinct points
X.1 ,..., Xs U P, such that d (x·) 1 ^^ k. X , and f(x.) 1 = m for all i,' ^ It is possible that such a set is a imion of open simplexes, and hence its dimension is easily defined. A map f ί Ρ
Μ is said to be n-regular with reference
to a dimensional function d on Ρ if it is nondegenerate and dim Sd (f; k^
k^)^ k^ + ... + k^ - (s-l)n.
for all s, and all s-tuples of non-negative integers. If dim Ρ ^ n, and since we have f nondegenerate then it
113
is possible to show that a map f is n-regular if it satisfies only a finite number of such inequalities, namely those for which all and
s
2n, The theorem that can be proved is this;
Theorem. Let X C Let
i" / Ρ
^^ where Μ is ND (n) and dim Ρ ^ η.
d^ and dp be dimensional functions on X and P, with
4
|
Suppose f X in n-regular with reference to d . Then f can be A
approximated arbitrarily closely by g : Ρ — ^
Μ with g X = f \ X and
g n-regular with reference to dp. The proof is along the lines of theorem 5.4.11. We find a regular presentation (p of Ρ with a subpresentation covering X, and such that d^ and dp are constant on elements of ^^ . We utilise theorem 5.4.10 to get g on the cells of ^
one at a time; in the
final atomic construction, analogous to part B) of 5.4.10, we will have SC^E where S is a (k-1)-sphere. Ε a cell of dimension ^ k + q, where q = n-p (the cell we are extending over is a p-cell, on which dp is constant^ p). We have to insert a k-cell that will intersect such things as ^s^^ in dimension
^
dim S^ (
5
l^s^ " ^
k^ + ... +
dp (p-cell) - s.n.
We can do this for our- situation; this inequality will imply
114
gj_ is n-regular. Ρ .Finally we can define on any polyhedron Ρ a canonical dimensional fiinction d : d (x) ! Min ^dim (Stary in fStar of χ in
fJ
y ζ: / Star of χ in p_7 J A function n-regular -with reference to this d -will be termed,· perhaps, in general position, it being understood that the target of the function is ND (n). Thus; Corollary; If X C. P> dim Ρ ^n, f ; Ρ — ^ M, Μ
a ND (n)-space, and
if f X is in general position then f X
can be extended to a map
g ;Ρ — Μ
g closely approximates f.
5.4.18.
in general position such that
Conclusion.
Finally, it should be remarked, that the above
'general position' theorems, interesting though they arej are not delicate enough for many applications in manifolds.
For example, one
needs : If f ; X — ^ Μ a map of a polyhedron X .into a manifold, and Y (^M, the approximation g should be such that not only dim (g(X) f^Y) is minimal, but also should have S^XgJ intersect Y »
minimally e.g. if 2x + y
2n, S(g) should not intersect Y at
all. The above procedure does not seem to give such results. If for example we know that Y can be moved by an isotopy of Μ to make its intersections minimal with some subpolyhedra of M, then these delicate theorems can be proved. This is true in the case of manifolds, and we refer to Zeeman's notes for all those theorems.
115
Chapter VI Regular Neipjhbourhoods The theory of regular neighbourhoods in due to J.H.C. Whitehead, and it has proved to be a very important tool in the study of piecewise linear manifolds.
Some of the important features of regular
neighbourhoods, which have proved to be useful in practice can be stated roughly as follows:
^
(1) a second derived neighbourhood is regular
(2) equivalence of two
regular neighbourhoods of the same polyhedron
(3) a regular neighbour-
hood collapses to the polyhedron to which it is regular neighbo\irhood .(4) a regular neighbourhood can be characterised in terms of collapsing. Whitehead's theory as well as its improvement by Zeeman are stated only for manifolds.
Here we try to obtain a workable theory of regular
neighbourhoods in arbitrary polyhedra; our point of view was suggested by M. Cohen, If X is a subpolyhedron of a polyhedron K, we define a regular neighbourhood of X in Ρ to be any subpolyhedron of Κ which is the image of a second derived neighbourhood of X, under a polyhedral equivalence of Κ which is fixed on X. It turns out that this is a polyhedral invariant, and any two regi£Lar neighbourhoods of X in Κ are equivalent by an isotopy which fixed both X and the complement of a common neighbourhood of the two regular neighbourhoods.
To secure
(4) above, we introduce "homogeneous collapsing". Applications to manifolds are scattered over the chapter. These and similar theorems
116
are due especially to Newman, Alexander, Whitehead and Zeeman. 6.1. Isotopy. Let X be a polyhedron and I the standard 1-cell. 6.1.1. Definition.
An isotopy of X in itself is a polyhedral self-
equivalence of X ^ I , which preserves the I-coordinate. That is, if h is the polyhedral equivalence of X 'XI, writing h(x,t) = ^h^ (x,t), h^ (x,t)), we have h2 (x,t) = t. The map of X into itself which takes χ to h^ (x,t) is a polyhedral equivalence of X and we denote this by h . Thus we can write h as h(x,t) = (h^ (x), t). We usually say that
'h is an isotopy between hQ and h^ ' , or 'h^
is isotopic to h^' or
'h is an isotopy from h^ to h^ '. The
composition (as functions) of two isotopics is again an isotopy, and the composition of two functions isotopic to identity is again isotopic to identity, Now we describe a way of constructing isotopies, which is particularly useful in the theory of regiilar neighbourhoods. 6.1.2. Proposition. Let X be the cone on A. Let f : X — ^ X be a polyhedral equivalence, such that f A = id^. Then there is an isotopy h : X X I and
> X .)ς I, such that h \ ( X X O ) y A X I = identity
h^ = f.
Proof; Let X be the cone on A with vertex v, the interval I =[l,o3 is the cone on 1 with vertex 0. Therefore by 4.3.19, X X I is the cone on X X 1 U A Λ I with vertex (v,0). Define
117
by h (x, 1) = (f{x), 1) for X ζ: X h (a, t) = (a, t)
for a t A^ t ^ I. ^
•
Since h | A = id^, h is well defined and is clearly a polyhedral equivalence. . We have h defined on the base of the cone; we extend it radially, by mapping (v, O) to and Identity on (v, 0),
(v, O),, that is we take the join of h
Calling this extension also h, we see that
h is a polyhedral equivalence and is the identity on (A χ I)
(v, O).
Since X X O U A K i C ( A X I ) ^^ (v, O) , h is identity on X y. 0 U A X I, To show that h preserves the I-coordinate, it is enough to check on (X Κ l)
(v., O), and this can be seen for example'
by observing that the t(x, 1) + (l-t) (v,0) of X )( I with reference to the conical representation is the same as the point (t χ + (l-t) v,t) of X X I with reference to the product representation, and writing down the maps,
Q
If h is an isotopy of X in itself j A h A
X, and if
= Id(A Κ l) as in the above case, we say that h leaves A
fixed. And some times, if h is an isotopy between Id^ and h., Λ
we will just say that
I
'h is an isotopy of X', and then an arbitrary
isotopy will be referred to as 'an isotopy of X in itself.
Probably
this is not strictly adhered to in what follows; perhaps.lt will be clear from the context, which is which. From the above proposition, the following well known theorem of Alexander can be deduced!
118
6.1.3. Corollary.
A polyhedral automorphism of an n-cell which is the
identity on the boundary, is isotopic to the identity by an isotopy leaving the boundary fixed,
D
It should be remarked that we are dealing with I-isotopics and these can be generalised as follows: 6. l./t. Definition.
Let J be the cone on Κ with vertex 0, A
J-isotopy of X is a polyhedral equivalence of X X J
which preserves
the J-coordinate. The isotopy is said to be between the map X ><. 0 - — ^ X ^ 0 and the map Χ Υ Κ — ^ X >> Κ, both induced by the equivalence of
XXJ.
And we can prove as above: 6.1.5. Proposition. Let X be the cone on A, and let f : X )<> Κ — ^ X
Κ be a polyhedral equivalence preserving the K-co-
ordinate and such that
f A X Κ = Id. . Then f is isotopic to AK Κ ^
the identity map of X by a J-isotopy h ; X >C J — ^
X
that on A "A J and X X 0, h is the identity map.
•
J, such
This is in particular applicable when J is an n-cell. 6.2.
Centerings, Isotopies and Neighbourhoods of Subpolyhedra. Let ^
be a regular presentation of a polyhedron P, and
let Y , 0 be two centerings of ^
Vjc
Gc
. Then obviously the correspondence
,
c f(p
gives a simplicial isomorphism of d( φ , V^ ) and d(
, θ), which
gives a polyhedral equivalence of P. We denote this by ^QJ» (coming from the map and f Yj
Tk C ' Q 0 fQ
0 C). Clearly f ^ = (f ) • η, 0 θ , rj ΐ ^ where V-j , 0, are three
119
centerings of 6.2.1. Proposition.
The map f
described above is isotopic to
the identity through an isotopy h : P ) < . I — ^ ^ ^(p >
Ρ χ ΐ ί such that if for
and θ are the same on C and all D ^ (p with D < C
then h C X I is identity.^ Proof; First, let us consider the case when Y| and β a single cell A. Then ^ Q St(ηA, d
((p,R]
aj^d f ^^ η
differ only on
is identity except on
ΘΑ, d ((p, θ
))| = |st(
This is a cone,
is identity on its base; then by 6.1.2.· We obtain an
isotopy of 1 St( V^A, d ((p , V] )) , which fixes the base. Hence it will patch up with the identity isotopy of Κ - |(St(V|A, d( φ , The general ^
^
))|.
is the composition of finitely many
of these special cases, and we just compose the isotopies obtained as above in the special cases. For isotopies constructed this way, the second assertion is obvious. . D Let X be a subpolyhedron of a polyhedron P, and let ^ be a simplicial presentation of Ρ
containing a full subpresentation
TO) covering X. We have defined Νφ( Χ») (in 3.1·) as the full subpresentation of d ^
, whose vertices are Y^ C for C
C Π X / 0. This of course depends on a centering Y\ of ^
with , and to
make this explicit we denote it by is usually called a 'second derived neighbourhood of X'. We know that (XJ , V^ )
is a neighbourhood of X, and that X is a deformation
retract of ^ Ν ^ ( Xj , ^ ) | (see 3.1). Our next aim is to show that any two second derived neighbourhoods of X in Ρ are equivalent by
120
an isotopy of Ρ leaving X, and a complement of a neighbourhood of both fixed. We go through a few preliminaries first. Ex. 6.2.2. With the same notation as above. Let V^ and ^ centerings of ^ C m
such that for every C
be two
> with
^ 0, η C = θ C. Then ί Ν φ ( ? ς , η )( =
(Λ.
) .
/"Hint! This can be seen for example by taking subdivisions of which are almost the same as d((p ,
) and d( (p , θ ), but leave
unalteredJ7. 6.2.3. Proposition. two centerings of φ
With X, P,}Cj , (p as above, let , and XJ
and 6 be
the union of all elements of ^
, whose
closure intersects X. Then there is an isotopy h of Ρ fixed on X and P - U
, such that h^ ( | Ν φ ( X,, Vj ) |) = j N(p ( Χ , 6 ) |
Proof; We first observe that P - U is a full subpresentation (J\. of ^
is a subpolyhedron of Ρ and there which covers P - U , namely, C
if and only if G Π X = 0. By 6.2.2 we can change Yj and and Q l without altering
Νρ (
may assume that V| and θ h
; Y| )
and
are the same on
of proposition 6.2.1 with the new f
desired properties,
.
on
Ql. ^
© ) . So we and (FL . The isotopy
^^ in the hypothesis has the
θ,η
D
With X, P, ")(Q Ί (P
as above, let CD t Ρ — ^
"ο, ϊ"
be
map given by: if ν is a ^-vertex φ ί ν ) = 0, if ν is a (φ _ X, )vertex- Cip(v) = 1, and CD is linear on the closures of ^ Then
cp~\o) = X, since ^
( p - %^ , then
X
is full in (p i If
0, if and only if
-simplexes.
is a simplex of
φ ( 1Γ) = (0, 1). If
121
^ s a simplex of (Jt ( CFl- as in the proof of proposition 2.3) then φ ( 6") = I· Roughly, the map <) ignores the parts of Ρ away from X
and focusses its attention on a neighbourhood of X. We vd.ll use this
map often. 6.2. U. Proposition.
With the above hypotheses, if 0
then there is an isotopy h of P, taking
φ
0, then Cp (
and O V . Let
) ^ "y , and choose
both in and out of
Ρ )
Let
with
arbitrarily on be the sub-
(To' I = \ )(>|= X. Obviously ( N^j ( X
[,Ο,"/^ ), and if
centerings
is a simplex of
(p' denote d((p,^).
presentation with φ
fixed.
Qo, Γ] described above. Choose a
centering• of (pas follows: if C Π X
^ is any simplex of
> then
^ and
of
(p
then
arbitrarily otherwise.
'CyC U
^ ( [_0, (i ) onto
) and leaving X and Ρ Proof: Let (D be the map: Ρ
<
φ
φ
)|=
with vertices
i γ ) = {0,y ). Now choose two
such that if
η C) = p> and
ρ
(p
and
Cf) ( β C) = c^ and
Then clearly
Ν
(ρ·
=
and Ν
ρ'
)(=
cp~uco,
We apply 6.2.3 now, and 'AjL of 6.2.3 in this case happens to be
9 ( Co, 7)) . D 6.2.5. Proposition. Let ^ subpresentation of Q
,
be a simplicial presentation, ^
φ = P,
and Ν = Ν φ ( ^ , Vj ) . Let ^
a full
^ = X, Vj a centering of (p ; be a siniplicial refinement of
122
(p ί
) T^ith
t e r i n g of (3^ and
"the s u b p r e s e n t a t i o n covering n'
θ
Ν'; and l e a v i n g
Β
a
cen-
.. Finally., let Λ λ be a .
n e i g h b o u r h o o d o f N . Then there i s a n i s o t o p y onto
X ; let
h o f P , takifig Ν
Ρ - λ Λ . a n d X fixed.
Remark' Note, that if
were somewhat lai;'ge, or if there were no
u
in the statement, then the proposition is an immediate consequence of 6.2.3 and 6.2.4. •t Proof; Ive first replace the centering T| by a centering followsi Let ^ : Ρ Ο
η
as
Qo, 1J be the usual function given by,
(^-vertex) - 0, Cp ( ^ _ ^ )-vertex = 1, and φ is linear on
the closures of
-simplexes. Choose
Γ|' such that if p is a
simplex of (J) with φ ( f ) = (0, l), then (|) ( Vj' ^ ) = h, ' is a polyhedral equivalence carrjring N,(P t. -1 onto Ν (p( % » η ' )| = φ ' ( a ] )· A c t u a l l y f η '"^η i s isotopic to the identity, but we will need only that it is a polyhedral equivalence. Let f I r| ("U.) = XL . As XiL' is a neighbour-1 hood of [_0, s3 we can find a Ύ > i such that
<) " ^ ( [ Ο , Ύ ^ ) C \Λ!·
^ince f ·γ| ι ^ γ^
to d( (p, V| ) and d( (p, rj') f y^ ι ^ V^ this
is refinement of
carries (3^onto a refinement of d( and similarly f η , ^ η (Λ^ ) by
the centering of
and
and
is simplicial with reference,
induced ^ from Q be
d( φ, η
T^ ').
Let us call
'. |Λ^· ( = X. Let We have,
123
Now choose another centering Let dC
< dC <
in X, then
^^
as follows!
k) be such that if ν is a vertex of
φ (v) >
. 0 ^ is chosen so that if
vertices in and out of X, then
Ν
of
Cp ( θ^
=
h
)=
taking
6" ζ:
. Then clearly
Ύ )) fixed, with
s}) onto
Ji] ). By 6.2.3 there is
an isotopy h' leaving X and complement of •with h /
taking
has
By 6.2.4, there is an isotopy
of P, leaving X and complement of
h^
(5^' not
φ ~ ((O, cJCJ ) -
fixed. onto
Ν Let
f
isotopy of Ρ in itself given by
i'Yj'^if] (p. t) = (f-Yj is the required isotopy. carries Ν
(p), t) ρ First
are alscr fixed on X. As
^^
(Pa
and (Z) 2
f y^', Yj
. They ·
carries X onto X, IJLonto Λχ'
.' Q
be two simplicial presentation of P, containing
2 and N^ =
= X. Let
^ and Q
^ ^
and 1
β
Ν
"XL ^ neighbourhood of Ρ
η^^ο hjoh^ofy^' y|
Corollary. Let X be a subpolyhedron of a polyhedron P. Let
full subpresentations
Μ,:
ο h'ο h ο f γ^,
), h and h' are fixed on P -
also fixes X and Ρ -
6.2.6.
=
Then
onto N'. Secondly since P - 'XjI.'ρ - Cp~^([0, g}) and
Ρ - \Λ!.ζ Ρ - φ"^([θ,
g
p.
leaving X and Ρ -
respectively with 2
be centering-of
Ν N^ in P.
(p
and and
Then there is an isotopy of
fixed and taking N^
onto N^.
124
Propf; Take a cOTnmon subdivision
of dC ^ ^, Θ
and
and apply 6.2.5 twice. 6.3. Definition of "Regular Neighbourhood". Let X be a subpolyhedron of a polyhedron P. 6.3.1.
Definition.
A subpolyhedron Ν is said to be regular neighbour-
hood of X in Ρ if there is a polyhedral equivalence h of Ρ on itself, leaving X fixed, such that h(N) is a second derived neighbourhood of X. More precisely Ν is a regular neighbourhood of X if and only if i) there is a simplicial presentation (p of Ρ · with a full subpresentation
covering
X
and a centering T^ of (p ; and ii) a polyhedral equivalence 'h of Ρ X
fixed on
such that h(N) = J N'^ ( X>, Γ) )|,
Regular neighbourhoods -do exist and if Ν is a regular neighbourhood of X in P, then Ν is a neighbourhood of X in P. 6.3.2. Proposition.
If N^ and lil^
two regular neighbourhoods of _
X in Ρ and \X, a neighbourhood of N^UN^ an isotopy h of Ρ taking N^
in P, then there exists
onto N^ and leaving X and Ρ - Ίλ,
fixed. Proof J Let
(p^, %
Y)
i
1 > 2, be such that
= Ν.,
Let
i
be a subdivision of d( (p^,
simplicial vdth reference to
i and let
= 1,
2.
such that h^ is ^ be the subpresentation
125
of
covering X. Let "
Ί
Q^
be a centering of I
1
say /"Note that h
is fixed on X_7.
By 6.2,5, there is an isotopy f, fixed on X and Ρ - h^ \ ΛΛ) vdth f, taking ((N(p ,( f h^ . /V Ch^
η
onto I N^^C^j^, e
.
^hen
is an isotopy of Ρ fixed on X and Ρ - IjL and ~^ I , l~sl = h^ f^ h^
takes N^
onto N^
(where h^ is the isotopy
of Ρ in itself given by h^ (p, t) = (h^ (p), t)). Working similarly with φ
we obtain f' with =
f'
fixed on X and Ρ - "U. and
taking N^ onto N^. Now nJ
genuine second derived neighbourhoods, and
is a neighbourhood of
Nj U N^ . Hence by 6.2.6 there is an isotopy g of Ρ and Ρ
fixed on X
, with g^ (N^') = N^'. (.h2 f h^ )
6.3.3»
and N^ are
Proposition.
g (h^ f h^
If f : Ρ — ^
) is the required isotopy.
U
P' is a polyhedral equivalence
and Ν a regular neighbourhood of X in P, then f(M) is a regular neighbourhood of f(X) in p'. Proof; Let
^^ , (p ' be a simplicial presentations of Ρ and P'
with reference to which f is simplicial^ (P , f( ^ ) = that X
^
be a centering of
the induced centering on (p ' ·
contain full subpresentations
and x'; (by going to subdivisions
,
can assume covering
necessary),
f (|N(P ( % , η )1) = |Ν (p, ( X'^ n ' M · By definition^ there is a polyhedral equivalence jj of Ρ fixed on X such that
126
p(N) =
()ς , η ) . Let ρ' ^he the polyhedral equivalence of
P' given by f.p.R'.
Then (f. ρ · f" J(N') = (f . p) (N) =
) 1 ) = | Ν φ > ( χ ' , η ' ) | , and i f therefore
f . ρ.
χ'6 f(X),
) = f. ρ (f"Vx')) = f ·
) tX,
) = x'.
Q
6.3.4. Notation. If A is a subset of a polyhedron P, we will denote by int ρ Μ and bd ^ Ν the interior and the boundary of Ν in the (unique) topology of P. Ex. 6.3.6. If Ν is a regular neighbourhood of X in P, and Β = bd ρ N, then Χ ζ ^ Ν - Β .
Q
Ex. 6.3.7. Let X C n C ^ Q ^ P
be polyhedra, vdth Ν ζ"int ρ Q. Then
Ν . is a regular neighbourhood of X in Q if and only if Ν is a regular neighbourhood of X in P. Β Ex. 6.3.8. Let Χζ_Ρ
be polyhedra.
If A is any subpolyhedron of
P, let A' denote the polyhedron A - intp X. Then Ν is a regular neighbourhood of X in Ρ if and only if N' is a regular neighbourhood of X' in P'. α Ex. 6.3.9. Let A be any polyhedron, and I the standard 1-cell. Let 0 < eC < p) < y
<
1 be three numbers. Then, A A^O,
a regular neighbourhood of A in A y. I, and A neighbourhood of A
is ^ regular
^ in A X. I.
6.3.10. Notation and proposition. If (p is any simplicial presentation and ^ vertices of φ
, we denote by (p^
whose set of vertices is ^ δφ^"^ )
£
.
) (when
(p
any set of
the maximal-sWpresentation of(P is full in φ
. We write
is understood) for
U ^((flSj
.
127
This is of course vdth reference to some centering Σ ) is a regular neighbourhood
of ί (P
^ ' ^^
^^
a set consisting of single vertex x, we have the some what confusing situation
{χ
J where χ denotes the 0-simplex with
vertex x. In this case we wi.ll write
Let and
^ =
Given a centering of
). JYt' •= d((D ,
Si
of
as η
). If ^
is the
consisting of the centers of elements of
(p^ = ^
and'Jin:' =
for
(p' " ^^ (p' ^ ^
^ ) (still calling η
set of vertices of , then
^
be a subpresentation of a simplicial presentation
be a centering of φ ) . Let =
^
^
=
is full in
(p
), we define
C) j , for any G t (p u [ C-r. C iz'^lf^^is a regular neighbourhood
We use the same notation
(
even when
is not
subpresentation, but a subset of ^^ . These are Used in the last part of the chapter. As the particular centerings are not so important, we ignore them from the terminology whenever possible. 6.4. Collaring. To study regular neighbourhoods in more detail we need a few facts about collarings. This section is devoted to proving these. 6.4.1. Definition. Let A be a subpolyhedron of a polyhedron P. A is said to be collared in P, if there is a polyhedral embedding
128
h of A )<, jo, Q in P, such that i) h (a, 0)
c for all a e A
ii) the image o·*" h is a neighbourhood of A in P. And the image of h is said to be a collar of A. 6.4.2.
Definition.
Let Ν be a subpolyhedron of a polyhedron Ρ
and let Β = Bd ρ N. Ν is said to be bicollared in Ρ if and only if i) Β is collared in Ν ii) Β is collared in Ρ - Ν, 6.2^.
Clearly this is equivalent to saying that there is a poly-
hedral embedding h of Β
+
in P. such that
i) h (b, 0) = b , b f Β ii) h {B
(0, + Q ) C ^ - ^
iii) h
6})(y
iv) the image of h is a neighbourhood of Β in P. 6.4.3-
Proposition.
If Ν is a regular neighbourhood of X in P,
then Ν is bicollared in P. Proof; It is enough to prove this for some convenient regular neighboai>· I
hood of X. Let ^ full subpresentation
be a simplicial'presentation of Ρ containing a covering X and let ^ t Ρ — ^
the usual map. We take Ν to be Bd ρ Ν = φ
^
be
^((Oj έ^) clearly
(g). Let us denote this by B. We can now show that is polyhedrally equivalent to Β Κ '-1, -+ Q
following way:
1
in the
129
Β has a regular presentation Q^ consisting of· all nonempty sets
Cf\(p\s)
for Γ
Likewise
^ ) has a polyhedral presentation,
consisting of all non-empty sets of the following sorts: Γ α φ ik) Γ α φ " ^ α, έ) (ΓΛφ^ (έ) (έ, i) Γ (-S
ί· of
-1j
for
α φ (I)
, (Oj + Ο,
{+
is a regular presentation
· There is an obvious combinatorial isomorphism between
and (j3) X ^
/which determines, is a appropriate centerings, a
polyhedral equivalence between Β )<,
1, + i
and
This shows that Ν is bicollared in P. Ex. 6ΛΛ.
5 ) C P· D
If A is collared in P, then any regular neighbourhood
of A in Ρ is a collar of A. /"Hint! Use 6.3.7 and
6.3.9_7.
Q
Thus if Ν is a regular neighbourhood of X in Ρ and Β = Bd ρ N, a regular neighbourhood of Β in Ρ - Ν is a collar of B. Ex. 6.U. 5.
If N^ is a regular neighbourhood of X in Ρ and
Ν2 is a regular neighbourhood of N^ in P, then is collar of Β = Bd „ Ν . 1 Ρ 1 /"Hint! Use 6.3.8 and S.k.hJ.
Ο
-
N^- Intp N,
130
Ex. 6.4.6. If N^ . is a regular neighbourhood of X in P, and N^ is a regular neighbourhood of N^ neighbourhood of X in P. Ex. 6.4.7.
(i) If M^
of X in Ρ with N^ Q
in P, then N^ is a regular
Ο
and N^ ar'e two regular neighbourhoods ^"^ρ
N^ - N^
is collar over
B, = Bd ρ N.,. (ii) N^ is a regular neighbourhood of N^. /"Hint: Take two regular neighbourhoods N^'j N^' of X, such that Ν ' - Ν ' is a collar and try to push Ν onto N^' and Ν •c 1 2 2 1 N/J.
onto
D The following remark will be useful later·:
Ex.. 6.4.8. Let Ν be bicollared in Ρ
and n' be a regvilar
neighbourhood of Ν in P. Then there is an isotopy of Ρ taking Ν
onto N'. If X C II^T Ρ Ν, this isotopy can be chosen so as to
fix X.
•
6.4.9. Definition. A pair (B, C) of polyhedra with Β ^ C, is said to be a cone pair if there is a polyhedral equivalence of Β onto a cone on C, which maps
C onto C.
Clearly in such a case we can ass\ime that the map on C is the identity.
And if (B^ C) is a cone pair, C is collared .
in B. 6.4.10.
Definition. Let AQ Ρ be polyhedra, and
'a' a point of
A. Then a pair (L , L ) is said to be a link of a in (P^ A) if Jr Λ 1) L.CI..
131
ii) L^ is a link of - a in A iii) Lp is a link of a in P. If (Lp', L,') is another link of a in (P, A), then the standard mistake Lp
^ Lp' takes L^ onto L^', and there-
fore there is a polyhedral equivalence L^ taking L — ^ L ι Ρ Ρ Λ ' A We shall briefly term this an equivalence of pairs (Lp , L ^ ) — ( L p , , ^^i^i^·
that, upto this equivalence, the link
of a in (P, A) is unique. 6.4.IT. Definition. Let
Ρ be polyhedra.
A is said to be
locally collared in Ρ if the link of a in (P, A) is a cone pair for every point a ζ A. Clearly k
0 is locally collared in A
Q , and
therefore if A is collared in P, it is locally collared. We will show presently that the converse is also.true. 6.4.12. Definition. Let Β be a subpolyhedron of A ^ Β
is said to be cross section if the projection A )<, [o, l]] — ^ A,
when restricted to Β is
1-1
and onto and so is a polyhedral
equivalence Β ii A.
6.4.13. Proposition.
Let Β be a cross-section
of A
Γ] .
contained in Α χ ( θ , I). Then there is a polyhedral equivalence h :.A:?<{o,i3
^ A A ^ , Q , leaving A χ ο
fixed, and taking Β onto
and Α χ ί
point wise
and such that
h (a)C [p, i]) = a X ^ , ij for all a ^ A. Remark; There is an obvious homeomorphism with these properties, but it is" not polyhedral.
132
Proof; Let ρ : Α Χ
^ A be the first projection. Trian-
gulate the polyhedral equivalence ρ Β s Β
A. Let (j^ and (Jl
be the simplioial pr'esentations of Β and A. l^J ^
ti]
^ simplioial
presentation of [o, β . Consider the centering T| of (JL χ ^ given by "n ( δ" )<. Τ
) ^ (barycenter of ζ" , barycenter of
We will define another regular presentation ^
),
of A "A I
as follows: For each ζ" ^ (Jt > Ρ \ ^ ) is the union* of the following five cells: 0 , p"^ ( Γ ) Π B,
Fr· '
^ σ- '
where ^ ^ is the region between C ^ 0 and ρ \ ) Γ\ Β - 1 Ο is the region between ρ (β") Γ\ Β and 1 · (Note that Ρ
( Γ )Π Β ^ ( Β J.
We take ^
to be the set of all these
cells as ^
varies over
a centering θ of first
, Choose
, such that the
co-ordinate of each of the five
cells above is the barycenter of Now there is an obvious combinatorial isomorphism 5
^^
choose
the centerings described we obtain
.
133
h :Λ
I—^
A
I which is simplicial relative to d(
d( O ^ X ^ ί ^ ), and has the desired properties.U.13· In this situation, define (a, t)
, Q) and
Π
AB,
a ^Λ, t ζ: I, 3 b eB, b = (a, s) , t 4
i.e. this is all the stuff of the left of 3. Then h takes /^B onto A
1
, Β onto
A^^.
In particular Β is collared
in ?\b. 6.4.14. vertex
"Spindle Maps". Let L Q A,
with the cone on L and
'a' contained in A. . Call the- cone S, • Suppose
open in A.
(This is the case when
a is a vertex of a simplicial
presentation (Jl of A, and L = ^Lk (a, (JL) Let p
S - L is
and S = j s t (a:, C l )
= I — ^ I be an imbedding with
β (1) = 1. In
this situation wc define the "spindle map". m ( p , L , a) : A X I — ^ A X I thus: on L ίί- a Vv l|,
it is the join of the identity map .on
L
•a» with the map
(a, t)
^ (a, |^(t)) of a Κ I.
On the rest of
A /vl it is the identity map. A spindle map m
is an embedding, and commutes with the
projection on A. If Β is a cross section of A')<^I^which does not intersect A
then m (B) has these properties also.
6.4.15. Proposition. Let kQ_?
be polyhedra.
If A is locally
collared in P, then A is collared in P. Proof: In Ρ
Γ
, consider the subpolyhedron
Q = P X 0 U a x [ 0 ,
i3 . We identify
Ρ with
Ρ Κ 0 (^Q.
Let (p
be a simplicial presentation of P, in which a subpresentation (JL
134
covers A, Consider a vertex Lk (a, Ο )
'a' of Q\ ; let L^ and Lp denote
Lk (a,(p ) \ , Then (L , L ) is a link of a ' L Λ in (P, A) and there is a polyhedral equivalence"^ : L — ^ L. ·$(• 15 for some r, taking L onto L^. We can make identity on L A and
by composing vd.th (7 L^)
id^
. And so we suppose
^ L^
is identity. We can suppose that ν is so situated larger vector space) that
(for example in a
-it- ν and L * (a, l) intersect only
A in L^^. Thus we have via "y and the identity on L ^f. (a, l) , a polyhedral equivalence of L^ = L VJ L ^ _ Q Ρ A
n.
(a, 1) with L A
Ε
where Ε ·=νν, (a, ' Η j which is identity on L^ * (a/l). Now L^ -if a is a star of
'a' in Q, and via this p,e. is poly-
hedrally ec[uivalent to L^ if- Ε -}(· a.
/
We can find a polyhedral equivalence ^
of Ε ·)(• a (which is equivalent
to a closed
1-cell) leaving ν
and (a, 1) fixed and taking (a, 0) to (a, 5).
Such a
obviously takes a)<.' 0, h, 1 onto aX Take the join of
^
and the identity map L^, this
gives a polyhedral equivalence of
-if a which is the identity
on Lj^. Hence this can bp extended to a polyhedral equivalence of Q by identity outside L^ •«· a. Let us call this equivalence of
135
^^ Pa·
l^a
C A
A Χ I is a spindle map.
and
Now take the composition h in any order of all such with A=
'a' running over all the vertices of
0 into a cross section h(A)
not intersect A
)
or
. This maps
β of A >^[^0,
which does
A γ. 0. Finally h(P) Γ\ A χ I =
Β is collared in ^ B, and so in h(P). Then, taking h ^ we see that A is collared in P.
Π
6.4.16. Corollary; If Μ is a P.L. Manifold with boundary M, then
Μ is collared in M.
•
Now, an application of the corollary: 6.4.17r
Proposition. If h is an isotopy of ^ M, then h
extends to an isotopy Η of M. Proof; Let
^ : I X I — ^ I be the map given by
β (s, t) = Max (t - s, 0). This is polyhedral, e.g. the diagram shows the triangulations and the images of the vertices. ^ is, 0) ^ 0, Define Η = ( ^ Μ ) ^ Ι ) Χ Ι - ^ by Η ((χ, s), t) ^ ((h
t) = 0, 0 (0, t) = t. (0ΜΑΐ)Χΐ s), t).
This is polyhedral. (x), s), 0) = ((x, s), 0), (s,0) since h^ = Id. Hence H^ = Id of ^ M K I.
Η ((χ, s), 0) ^ = ((h
Η ((χ, 0), t) = ((h^ ^ (x), 0), t) = ((h (x), 0), t). Ρ (0,t) t Thus Η extends the isotopy ^ Μ Κ 0 given by h (identifying ^ Μ and
M)i. O).
136
And Η ((χ, 1), t) ^ ((h
^^ (χ), 1), t)
= ((χ, 1), t) since Hence Η
(Jb (ΐ, t) = 0.
Μ A 1 is identity. Hencfe the isotopy h of
Β Μ
extends to an isotopy Η of any collar so that at the upper end of the collar it is identity again, and therefore it can be-extended inside. Thus h extends to an isotopy of M.
Π
6.5. Absolute Regular Neighbourhoods and some Newmanish Theorems. 6.5. t. Definition.
A pair of a polyhedra (p, A) is said to be an
absolute regular neighbourhood of a polyhedron X, if i) X Q Ρ - A ii) Ρ
0 is a regular neighbourhood of
X Κ 0 in Ρ >s 0 U A
0 C Ρ X [?' Κ ·
Hence A is collared in P. I
·
Probably, it will be more natural,to consider X, Ρ and t A in an ambient polyhedron Μ in which Ρ is a neighbourhood of X
as in links and stars. But, after the definition of regular
,
neighbourhood, absolute regular neighbourhood is just a convenient name to use in some tricky situations. Ex. 6.5.2. If (p, A) Xs an absolute regiilar neighbourhood of .X and if h s Ρ •—^ p' is a polyhedral equivalence, then (P', h A) is an absolute regular neighbourhood of h X.
D
Ex. 6. 5· 3· If Ν is a regular neighbourhood of X ,in P, and Β = Bd ^ N, then (N, B) is an absolute regular neighbourhood of • 1
X.
Q
.
137
Ex. 6.5.4. Let F C Q} and suppose that ' (P, A) is an absolute reg^ilar neighbourhood of X, and Ρ - A is open in Q, and A is locally collared in Q - (P -A). hood of X in Q.
Then Γ is a regular neighbour-
•
Ex. 6.5.5. Let C (A) be the cone on A with vertex v. Then (C (A), A) is an absolute regular neighbourhood of v. In particular if D is an n-cell,. (D, ^ D) is an absolute regular neighbourhood of any point χ t D - ^ D. 6.5.6. Theorem. If D is an n-cell, Μ D
0
a PL-raanifold,
Int M, then D is a regular neighbourhood of any χ 6 D -
D
in M.. 6.5.7. Corollary.- If D is an n-cell in an n-sphere S, then S - D is an n-cell.. Proof of the theorem; The proof of the theorem is by induction on the dimension of M; we assume the,theorem as well as the corollary for η - 1. i) First we must show that
D-
D is open in M.
If we look at the links, this would follow if we know that a polyhedral imbedding of an (n-l)-sphere in an (n-l)-sphere is necessarily onto. And this can be easily seen by looking at the links again and induction, (see 4.4 in particular 4.4,. 14 and 4,4. 17(a)).. ii) If we know that "d D is collared in Μ - Int D (it is collared in D), we are through by 6.5.4. For this, it is enough to show that
'b D is locally collared in M- int D, Consider a
link of a in M, say
such that a link of
'a' in D is
138
an (n-O-cell D^"^ C S^ ^ , with d""^ Π a
*
a,
D - ^ d" \
a
It is
, 3 .
clearly possible to choose such links (see λΛ. 1? (b)). ~ Now, a link of
'a' in M ^ int D is a
- (d"^"^ a
). a
/. \ ^ -V, n-1 1 "S in U ; 2a - Ο is open in Sa and therefore the link ^ Da of a in Μ - int D is But by the corollary to the o.
cL
theorem in the (n-l)-case, this is an (n-l)-cell, say and it meets D in is equivalent to
=
(C ( ^ Λ
• And (
^Λ"^'^)·
^
Therefore
)
^ D is
locally collared in Μ - int D and we are through. Proof of the corollary assuming the theorem; Represent s"^, a standard n-sphere as a suspension of s'^ ^, a standard and observe that the lower hemisphere
(n-1 )-sphere,
(say D ) is a regular
neighbourhood of the south pole, say s. Let f be a polyhedral equivalence of S to
taking a point χ t D -
D to the south
pole s. By the theorem D is a regular neighbourhood of x, therefore f(D) is a regular neighbourhood of the s in s". By. 6.3.2 there is a polyhedral equivalence ρ of S'^ such that p(D ) = f(D). Therefore f (S - D) = f (S) - f (D) = S"^ - ρ (D^) = ρ (S") - ρ (D^) =p(S
- D s) = P ( D η) , where Dη denotes the upper hemisphere, -1
Therefore p~ . f (S - D) - D η
or S _ D is a n-cell.
Q
Ex. 6.5.S. Corollary. If Μ is a PL n-msnifold and D^, D^ are two n-cells contained in the interior of the same component of M, then there is an isotopy h of the identity map of M, such that h(D^) ^ D^.
Q
139
We usually express this by sayine that "any two n-cells in the interior of the same component of Μ are equivalent" or that they are "eq-uivalent by an isotopy of M". If Μ is a PL n-manifold, "^M its boundary, then by 6.5.8, any two
(n-l)-cells in the same component of
lent by an isotopy of d M.
^M
are equiva-
Since this is actually an isotopy of the
identity, by 6.Zt. 1? we can extend it to M. Thus 6.5.9. Proposition. Μ
Any two
(n-l)-cells in the same component of
are equivalent by an isotopy of M. • This immediately gives
Ex. 6.5.10.
If D is an n-cell and Δ
then (D, Δ
) is a cone pair (That is, there is a polyhedral
equivalence of
(D, Δ ) and
(c{
an (n-1 )-cell in ^ D,
), Δ ). And we have seen such
a polyhedral equivalence can be assumed to be identity on Δ
). Q
This can also be formulated as: Ex. 6. 5. 10^
If Λ ^ is an (n-l)-cell in the boundary of D^, an
n-cell, i - 1, 2, any polyhedral equivalence be extended to a polyhedral equivalence
D^ — ^
Λ ^
^ Δ 2
Dg. D
Also from 6.5.9, it is easy to deduce if Δ
is any
(n-l)-cell in ^ M, then there is at least one n-cell D in Μ such that D
= AC^i^'From this follows the useful proposition:
Ex. 6.5.11.
If Μ is a PL n-manifold and D an n-cell with
ΜΟ D=
D - an (n-l)-cell, then M O D
is polyhedrally
equivalent to M. Moreover, the polyhedral equivalence can be chosen to be identity outside any given neighbourhood of M U D
in M. -Q
140
The methods of the proof of the theorem 6.5.6, can be used to prove the following two propositions, which somewhat clarify the nature of regular neighbourhoods in manifolds: Ex. 6.5.12. Let Μ be a PL-manifold, ^ Μ its boundary (possibly 0), and Ν a regular neighbourhood of X in M. Then a) Ν is a PL-manifold with (non-empty) boundary unless X is a union of components of M. b) If X C Μ - δ Μ, then Ν ^ Μ - b Μ, the interior of Μ. c) If X A "^M / 0, Ν n ^ Μ is a regular neighbourhood of X Pv ^ Μ in
M.
d) In case c), Bd ^^ Ν is an (n-1)-manifold, meeting
^ Μ in an (n-2)-manifold
where N' = Ν A /"Note that int M
Ν and bd M
Ν denote the interior and
boundary of Ν in the topology of M. On the otherhand if Ν is a PL-manifold int Ν
and
"δ" Ν denotes the sets of points of Ν
whose links are spheres and cells respectively_7. Hint: Use 4.4.8.
D
Ex. 6.5.13. If Ν is a regular neighbourhood of X in M, a PL-manifold with X Ν
int M, and n' is polyhedrally equivalent to
and located in the interior of a PL-manifold M^ of the same
dimension as M^ then n' is a regular neighbourhood of x' in M^, where x' is the image of X mder the polyhedral equivalence Ν — ^ M'.
Q
141
Ex. 6.5.14. Λ is any polyhedron, and I the standard 1-cell (A yi.1, A y. 1) is an absolute regular neighbourhood of A 0 < cC
1J then
0. If
0, 1 [·) is an absolute regular neigh-
bourhood of A X ^
.
D
Ex. 6. 5. 1 T h e union of two n-manifolds intersecting in an (n-l) submanifold of their boundaries is an n-manifold. tX 6.6. Collapsing. 6.6.1.' Definition. Let (p be a regular presentation.
A free edge
of (p is some Ε ^ φ ) such that there-exists one and only one A ^ ^
with Ε < A. We may term A the attaching membrane of the
free edge E. It is clear that A is not in the boundary of any other element of (p ; for if A < B, then Ε <, B. It is easily proved that dim A = 1 + dim E. The set (p - • E, A | is again a regular presentation, and is said to be obtained from ^^ by an elementary collapse at the free edge E. 6.6.2.
Definition.
We say that a polyhedral presentation (p
collapses (combinatorially) to a polyhedral presentation write (p V
ί if there exists a finite sequence of presentations (P^ , ....
and cells Ε
Ε 1
(p
, and
with (P - (P^
and
(P^
d
, Ε. f fp s.t.fp is obtained from k-1 1 ^ vl i Vi
by an elementary collapse at E^ ^.
6.6.3. Proposition. If ^ collapse at E; and if
φ'
is obtained from (p -by an elementary is obtained from |p by bisecting a
]ΐα
cell C by a bisection of space (L; Η is the subpresentation with
H-) and if
ICH'
C (p 0^'·
/"Remark! Recall that, we have been always dealing with Euclidean polyhedra_7. 9·
Proof; If the bisection is trivial there is nothing to prove, so suppose that the bisection is non trivial. Then there are three cases. Case (i) edge of thus
C is neither Ε nor A, In this case, Ε is a free ^ ' with attaching membrane A, and
^
is obtained from
^
^p' - ^E,
by an elementary collapse.
Case (ii) C - E. Define E^ = Η + Π Ε, E2 = Η - fj Ε, F = L Π Ε. Then we have U
^
F
and no other cells of
Thus E^
is a free edge of
is a free edge of
^ A
are greater than F, E^, E^ or A.
^
with attaching membrane
A; F
o' - • E^, A . with attaching membrane E^.
The result of these two elementary collapses is
=
.
Case (iii)
C =A
·
Define A^ = H+ Π k, k^ ^ Hcontains
k, Β = L Π A. Mow ^ A^ 0
A, and therefore either ^ A^
Θ
or b A^ intersects E;
say, ^ A^ Π Ε / 0. Then, (p' being regular, we must have Ε <_ A^; then for dimensional reasons, dim Ε = dim B, we cannot have Ε ^ B hence Ε summary,
H+ ; and so it is impossible to have Ε < A^. In Ε < A^ > Β < A^.
Thus Ε is a free face of is a free face of
(p
(p' - ' E, A^
with attaching membrane
with attaching membrane A^.
The result of these two elementary collapses is I 6.6.4. Proposition. If (p
, and
|P
^.
Q
is obtained from
by a finite sequence of bisections of cells, and presentation of defined? by μ [0^1 ; then
(P
A^ ; Β
is the sub(p' V C ^ ' ·
Proof: The proof is by induction, first, on the number of collapses in
(p V
, and second, on the number of bisections involved.
The inductive step is 6.6.3.
D
6.6.5. Definition. We say that a polyhedron Ρ collapses (geometrically) to a subpolyhedron Q, if there is a regular presentation (p of Ρ with a subpresentation (3^ covering Q, such that (J) collapses combinatorially to (3> . We write Ρ ^ Q .
144
This notion is polyhedrally invariant: 6.6.6. Proposition. equivalence, then X
If Ρ V Qj and
·.
Ρ
f X is Β polyhedral
VOC(Q).
Proof; There are regular presentations φ , (p V Ρ
of Ρ
and Q, vath
combinatorially, and simplicial presentations Λ> J Xa
and X vdth J^ simplicial relative to /Λ and Xa . There is a
regular presentation
(p' of Ρ refining
from (p (also from A
^ and Λ
but we do not need it in this proposition) by
a finite sequence of bisections. Hence if of
(p' covering Q, then
(p' V
=[dC(c) (c
is the subpresentation by 6.6.4. Since ^ is
one-to-one and linear on each element of cL ( φ Ί
j and obtained
^
, the set
^(p'] is a regular presentation of X, which
m I·
I
is combinatorially isomorphic to
(p ' 5 and
cL (
) is a sub-
presentation covering «^(Q), which is combinatorially isomorphic to
Therefore
oC((p')
0^) or X VCC(Q).
6.6.7. Proposition. If Ρ V ^o ' ^nd
I Proof! Let ^ ^ , ^ ^ and (p
^
V P„ , then Ρ
di
Ρ.
I
be presentation of P^ , P^ with φ ^ ^(pg'
(p ^ be presentations of P^ , P^ with (P3
By 1.10.6 there is a regular refinement and subpresentations ^ ^^
Π
of ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ 0 (P 3 0(P 4' ^th (p . ^ =
obtained from (p ^ by a sequence of bisections. Clearly
= ό^3 therefore
and by 6.6.4, ^ ^2· ^
6.6.8. Proposition. then Ν ^ X.
^ V
3
If Ν is a regular neighbourhood of X in P,
145
Proof: By virtue of 6.6.6 and the definition of regular neighbourhood, it is enough to look at any particular M. Let (p be a simplicial presentation of Ρ vdth a full subpresentation let
φ : Ρ —> [_0, Q Let ^
both in ^
covering X; and
be the usual map. Take Ν -
denote all the simplexes of (p having vertices
and ( φ - % ) .
number of elements of ^
We prove Ν ^s/X by induction on the
. If
χ
= 0, then Ν = X, and there is
nothing to do. Hence we can start the induction. LetJft
=X
0
υ
ι ^
Then "Tt. is a regular presentation of N. If of maximal dimension, attaching membrane
^ Π φ ς;"·
principal simplex of φ
Vg)
is an element of
is a free edge of "Tt with
((O,
(Mote that CT is a
i.e. not the face of any other simplex).
After doing the elementary collapse we are left with
-OHC'· Now
(p' is a regular presentation containing the corresponding so, -Tt
^ .
= ^
-
, and
^ . Hence inductively
α
Ex. 6.6.9. Let N' be a neighbourhood of X in P, (all polyhedra). If Ν
V X, then there is a regular neighbourhood
M([_Int ρ n' such that N. 6.7. Homogeneous Collapsing. Let ^
Ν of X in P,
D
be a regular presentation, with E, A ^ffi , Ε < A
and dim A = dim Ε + 1. Recall the definition of ^
φ) E. This is defined.
145^
relative to some centering
of ^
, to be the fiill subpresentation
of d (p whose vertices are 6.7.1.
\® ^^
Definition. Let E, A, ^ ; be as above and
V^ be a
centering of (p . (E, A) is said to be homogenous in (p , if there is a polyhedron X and a polyhedral equivalence a suspension of X, such that
f(
f:
^X
A) = w.
It is easily seen that if this is true for one centering of
, then it is true for any other centering of
"(E, A) is homogeneous in ^
; hence
" is well defined.
6.7.2. Definition. Let % C
subpresentationsof ^
. We say
that "ATT collapses to 'Xa homogeneously (comblnatorially) in (j^ , if there is a finite sequence of subpresentations of (p ,
and pairs of cells (E^, A ^
, E., A. ^ ^ t ·
such that 1) Jit, =
, -^rt =
' 2)
. k is obtained from
i+1
by an elementary i
collapse at E^^ a free edge of "tc . with attaching membrane A^, for i = 1, and
3) (E^, A^) is homogeneous in φ) , for i = 1,.., k-lj
6.7.3. Proposition.
If
(p*is obtained from
cell C by a bisection of space with
obtained from
,
^
by bisecting a
(L; H+ , H-); and if X C ^ ^ CL(p >
by an elementary collapse at a free edge
Ε with attaching membrane A, where and if
k-1
(E^ A) is homogenous in ("b ;
are the subpresentations of
^
covering
146
and
; then
homogeneously in
^
.
Proof; If the bisection in trivial there is nothing to prove. If it is not trivial, there are three cases as in the proof of proposition 6.6^3· Case 1; C is neither Ε nor Α., In this case the only problem is to show that (E, A) is homogeneous in (p
. Let us suppose that
everything is occuring in a vector space V of dim n; and let dim Ε = k. Then there is an orthogonal linear manifold Μ of dimension (n-k), intersecting Ε in a single point
(E) = e, say..
It is fairly easy to verify that in such a situation if
If we now choose centerings of Q
D,. then
and
so that
whenever D fV Μ / 0,. we have the center of D belonging to M, then defining D A M D r^M ^ 0, D and
and
similarly with respect to
,
^
·
, we will have:
are regular presentations of
λ(ρ (Ε)
and
ί\|ρΐ(Ε)| are links of e in
hence polyhedrally equivalent
Γ\ M. Hence both (p Π
and
(by an approximation to the standard
mistake); if we choose a center of A the same in both case, we get a polyhedral equivalence taking hypothesis
/\Π(Ε)
A to
Y^ A.
Finally, by
is equivalent to a suspension with Y^ A as
a pole; and so
Λφ'(Ε)
homogenous in
'
has the same property, and (E, A) is
\hl
Case 2; C = Ε ; we define E^, E^, F as in the proof of 6.6.3· We have to show that
(E^, Λ) and
(F, E^) are homogeneous in
(p '·
I That fact
(Ε)
any D ^E^ ^
(E^, A) is homogeneous in
^
follows from the
appropriate centerings) because φ
is an element of Q) which is
and hence,
being regular ^ E. That
(F, E^) . is homogeneous in
, we see by the
formula:
(calling the appropriate centering of Case 3: C = A ; we define have to show that
^ ' also Y ).
A^, A^, Β as in the proof of 6.6.3· We
(E, A^) and
(B, A^) are homogenous.
There is a simplicial isomorphism taking Y" (A) onto we have
Γ|(Α^).
vAp' (E)
And as (E, A) is homogeneous in φ ,
(E, A^) is homogeneous in That
^^^
^
.
(B, k^) is homogeneous in
^
we see by a formula
like that in case 2:
(Β) - /\(p(A) 6.7· 4. Proposition.
If --ίγ^ ^ ^
k^, η A^
α
homogeneously in (p , and
Ο
is obtained from ^^ by a finite sequence of bisections of space, and are the subpresentations of then
homogeneously in
^
(p
covering (vJK | and \ Xj ,
.
This follows from 6.7.3, as 6,6.4 from 6.6.3· 6.7.5.
Definition.
O-
Let Ρ be a polyhedron, and X, Ν subpolyhedra
148
of P. Ν is said to collapse homogeneously (geometrically) to X in P, if there are regular presentation
C. "Tt.
covering
X, Ν and Ρ respectively such that ^ ^ collapses homogeneously to combinatorially in ^^ We write
X
homogeneously in P. This definition is
again polyhedrally invariant: 6.-7.6, Proposition.. If Ν
X homogeneously in P, and dC '· Ρ — ^ Q
is a polyhedral equivalence, then
(N) — ^
homogeneously in
Q. This follows from 6.7Λ as 6.6.6 from 6.6.4. 6.7.7. Proposition. If Ν is a regular neighbourhood of X in P, then Ν
X homogeneously in P.
Proof; As in 6.6.8j we start with a simplicial presentation φ Ρ
of
in which a full subpresentation 'Xj , covers X, and take
Ν
where C^ : Ρ — ^ [o, 1
is the. usual map. By .
virtue of 6.7.6, and the definition of regular neighbourhood, it is enough to prove that this Ν V X homogeneously. Let "-^IX be the regular presentation of Ν consisting of cells of the form: simplexes of k)), for
Q
Αφ^(έ)
, for
^-th φ (
- (0,1) - (0,1)
to consist of all simplexes of
,
all simplexes of Q!) which have no vertices in
.
149
ίΓ
((Ο, i)) for Γ ^ Ρ
<Γ Λφ((2))
with Ci) ( Ο = (0,1)
^"AmVgj Ο J Αφ ^
is a re^g-olar presentation of F which refines (p , and has as
subpresentations
and
.
^Yl^ and
are the same as in
proposition 6.6, δ, and therefore we know that "^YX. claim is Ε
iy '^C. homogeneously in -'(έ), A =
. Now, the
(p . In otherwords, if
i)), where <Γ
with(p (tT) =
we have to show that (E, A) is homogeneous in denoting by (j^ the subpresentation of
. In fact
covering
"''(g),
we have Γ (p,(E) -
)
'Ad^^^) Γ
τ
where
0).
α
6.8. The Regular Neighbourhood Theorem. We have seen that if Ν is a regular neighbourhood of X in P, then 1) X C
int ρ Ν
2) Μ is bicollared in Ρ 3) Ν
X homogeneously in P.
Conversely. 6.β.1. The Regular Neighbourhood Theorem. If X
Ν 0
Ρ are polyhedra such that xQnt. pN
2) Ν is bicollared in Ρ
150
3) Ν ν Χ homogeneously in ' Ρ then Ν is a regular neighbourhood of X in
P.
The proof will start with some technicalities which exploit the homogeneity of the collapsing
(The X'S, P's etc. occuring mean-
while should not be confused with the X, Ρ of the theorem). 6.8.2. Proposition. Let Y
X be polyhedra, and let Ρ = X ^^
w
a suspension of X. Then a regular neighbourhood of Y * ν in Ρ is a regular neighbourhood of ν in P. /"in other words, a regular neighbourhood of a subcone of a suspension is a regular neighbourhood of one of the polesJ7. Proof; Let C^ (X) denote X * ν be the join of the maps X
and let ffi ; C^ (X)
^
^ 1 and ν — ^ 0. For any Ζ
l"] X,
C ^ (Ζ) for 0 < cC < 1 will denote the set of points < (1-t) v + t z
ζ;ζ;Ζ,
. If Ζ is a subpolyhedron
c ^ (Z) = (Z ^^ v) r\ cf\\0, dC] ). By 6.3.7? it is enough to prove the proposition for some regular neighbourhood of X -ίί- v. Hence, by a couple of maps, it is enough to show that ^
i® ^ regular neighbourhood of Ci (Υ) in
C^ (X). (It is clearly a regular neighbourhood of ν in C^ (X)). Let ^ subpresentation
be a simplicial presentation of X, containing a covering Y. We define a regular presentation
of G^ (X) to consist of: vl
_ for (T € Ai for
C- "Xi""^
151
Then
(p
^ W
Π
φ " ' ((Ο, i ) ) ]
γ Η
π
φ - ^ (έ)
α
φ
covering C ^(Υ), and for each
with A η Ci (Y) / 0
(g, l). Choose a centering η
^Ίι
ik, 1 )
has a subpresentation
(p -Q^
for ^
φ (A) includes the interval
of (p
, so that for all A ^ (p
with A Π Ci (Y) ^ 0, φ ( ^ A) Then d((p , η ) has the property that if f vd-th vertices both in d
and in d φ
contains
and d
is full in d (p . Choose a centering 0
of d ^
so that for ^ ζ d (p
ύΡ
=
and thus
and V.
Q
- d (3) y then
is a simplex )
with vertices in and out of c)
Now Ν =
(der,, ©)( =
([?>
i^J) is a regular neighbourhood of both Ci (Υ)
Now, let Ρ be a polyhedron and presentation of _P. Let centering of ^
^ (
a simplicial
of vertices of (p and η
, Recall the definition of
(^φ ( X
a
) QAvci (p£
(6.3.10).
ci(p( Ε ) = υ [
Ι^^Σ} the vertices of y^-are xn(p^
(PΣ.is full in (P hood of in F.
A
(p I'^CP ^
^ regular neighbour-
Let C(P) = Ρ -s- V be a cone on Ρ and φ : C(p)—^ be the join of ν — > 0 and Ρ — >
1. If L is a subpolyhedron of
1
152
- 1
Ρ; 0
1, C ^ ( L )
will mean
(L * v) Λ φ "
before.
([o, J ) as
1, we shall mean
(L ^ v) π φ'^ ( (ciC , and Ρ T^jX , p j
). In particular C^ (P) =
=
l] )
, p)] ). The simplicial presentation
of C(F) will be denoted by C((p). 6.8.3. Proposition. There is a centering of C((p ) with respect to which
.- 0
IScdi^vl· C^(p)
2)
^ [ b l] for any vertex
G.of Proofs
(p .
We take any centering
of (p , and extend it to C(
)
by defining η ( crlv}) = i η( r ) H- λ V, for Γ
.
Then it is obvious that φ is simplicial relative to d (C((p ), Γ| ) _0, l3 with vertices
and the triangulation of
From this it easily follows that
IV =
1 ^ . (P).
The second assertion can be proved by a straight forward messy computation as follows': A typical simplex of d( (p , rj ) of the form 0( Ipj a =
^ φ i^) is a face of simplex of η ^
η
with
η
A point i n
1:
L^lo
>···' ^k ' ^
>
k that t^ ^ 0, 2 Γ t i =1, g 4
and the point is; k ^
1
i, 1 is uniquely determined by
· 1
4
153
Γ On the otherhand, a simplex of of a simplex determined by some L vdtha=ηQ,
(a)
Q
( )
.
is a face
between 0 and k, and vertices
η .
< Γ 2 ···
A typical point in the closure of such a simplex is uniquely determined by ϊ^Ο
'
'•^here r^, s. ^ 0 and
k Σ1 ° («0
I'i + A
S. '
t
"i η
1. The point is k
1 ·
Ί1
(έ η ^ - i V).
Comparing coefficients in (*) and
we find that these
points coincide if: (A)
^
- 1- έ ^
3
Τ t, -li «c t;
, i < L.
= ''i·' h
tj - έ !j. (B)
r.
'I
Sj
> j>
It., i <1 t j -1 Ίk - 2(1 - «ί, (1 + 211 t+ 1
' ¥
= 2 cC t^, j > L
t^))
.
/~To be sure, we should have started in i"»^) with an index different from k. But it can be easily seen that, vdien determing whether the points coincide, it is enough to consider
and
154
To show that
ο CC(p)ia) ( C
we need to check that if (being
r's and
s's satisfy their conditions
and of sum l), then the solutions in · (A) for dC and
the t's satisfy theirs sum
h, 1
5(p(a)
4 ci^
1 and the t's are ^
0 with
l). This is easy. To show that
we need to check if
(P ^^^ ^
^
_}> Q
C-
1 ί ςςφ^^Α '
1, and the t's are ^
0 with sum 1,
then there is some iL for which the solutions found in (B) satisfy the appropriate conditions. That the sum of r's and
s's is one is
clear; to make all ^ 0, we take t to be the maximum of those integers (m) for which k
'* Σ
ν
'4
m k Since
ΐΛ ^ 2, and t. = 1, there is such an I. ; this < 0 J choice of ^ makes both r'^t» and s > y 0, Q
Remark»
If
is a set of verticer of (p , we have as above,
c^^CMpi ^
^^
%
( r ) X έ, 1
Now let Ρ = X * u, w h be a suspension. We define the lower hemisphere L of Ρ to be X
u
j it should be, remarked
that L is a regular neighboiorhood of u in P. 6.8.4. Proposition. With P, X, L as above there is a polyhedral equivalence h : C(P)
h fLY,
(T
1 ] U
^ C(P)
with h Ρ ^ idp , such that
Ci (P)) = L A [4, l].
Proof; We, can draw a picture which is a "cross section" through any particular point χ in X:
155
/~The picture is actually the union of the two triangles Qc, V,
v, w and
in C(P), which we have
flattened out to put in a planar picture. The vertically shaded part is the portion of Ly,^^,
in
the cross section and the horizontally shaded part is the part of Ci (P) ' in the cross section. We have to push the union of these two into the vertically shaded portion, and this uniformly over all cross sections_7. From this picture we may see the following: (^P) is the union of A=
[έ,
Β = I^X And
A Π Β = ^X
*
wj , and
s]·^^ J where J = ν ^^ [u, wj . |^ *
[
'
Now J is just, polyhedrally, an interval, and so there is obviously a polyhedral equivalence
f ;J— ^ J
such that
f (u) = u, f (w) = w f(|v+|w)=|v+|u. Such an f will take the part j^u, vj ^ j^v, g ν + g w"^ onto [u, i u + έ vj. Let g ,ί Β — ^ Β be the join of f on J and identity on Χ Χ 2. It is clear that g A Γ\ Β is the identity map, and so by extending by identity on A, we get a polyhedral equivalence
156
say h : C(P)
^ C(P).
It should be pictorially evident that h has the desired properties.
Q.
Putting all these together we get the proposition which we need! 6.8.5. Proposition. Hypotheses;
(l) φ) is a simplicial presentation of P, C(P) the
cone over Ρ with vertex v, C((p) = (p set of vertices of (p
{[v}} , and
χ;
a
.
(2) There is a polyhedron X and a polyhedral equivalence h ; Ρ
> X ^^ -^u,
such that h(
)= Y
u, for
some Y C (3)
and
with reference to some centering'^"
(P ),ίΣ)
of C( (T^ ).
Conclusion; There is a polyhedral equivalence such that
X
Ρ = id ρ
and
are constructed
; C(P)
maps C((p )
onto
( i C(
be the centering of C( (p ) described in proposition f= f ^
onto d(C(^
X
simplicial isomorphism of d(C((p
/> )
).
Let h^ : C(P) h JΡ
υ (ί.
.
Proof: Let 6.8.3. Let
^ C(P)
^ . C(X *
wj) be the join of
f u, w]· and the map vertex to vertex. _J in
Now
Οφ^"^'
P, and therefore h f( h f(
|(pj. I
) in
is a regular neighbourhood of ) is a reg-ular neighbourhood - in w}. But f( )= iP^
fact- f, maps -every ^ -simplex onto itself - and h( ^(p^ ) - Y * u.
157
Thus h f( (^φ('Σΐ) ) is a regular neighbourhood of Y X ^^ ^u, wj . Therefore by 6.8.2, h f( neighbourhood of u
u in
) is a regular
in X * -^u, w j > But so is X * u. Hence there
is a polyhedral equivalence ^
:X
' u, w^ — ^
X
•
such
that Ρ Let
(h f(
j2> ^ : C(X * ^u, w^ )
)) = X ^^ u. C(X
{u, w^ ) be the join of
and identity map of the vertex of the cone. Now f is such that fi <5 ο(φ
Since
^ " ^^
^
I
^ and h^ are radial extensions the same thing
holds, i.e. b 1 = which is ^X ^
Γ
h f (
Γ
and
= Ci (X
{u, w·^ ).
Applying 6.8.4, we get a polyhedral equivalence "y ! G(X ^^ {u,
) — > C(x ^ {u, wj ) with y j X * [u, wj =
identity and
y
^ ( X ^^ u )
l] = (X
U
c ^ (X ^ [ u , w ]
u)
Q .
The desired map J^ is now, Χ
=
0 h"^ 0
ογ
0
0 h^ 0 f
.D
We v/ill now write down two specific corollaries of proposition 6.8.5, which will immediately give the regular neighbourhood theorem. First we recall the notation at the end of section
3 (6.3.10). If ^
is regular presentation, given a centering "Tj of^p
and a centering of
,Υγ ), we defined c·»^ =
and, If
of and in
, for any C
= U -[ c* C
for any subset
of (p .
is a subpresentation of J) , then d(-Jlft , η ) (where Y] Jy^
is again denoted by ,
0 d(p
) is full in d( φ , rj ). Writing
=
rj )
(p' = ά(φ
(p'
of the form
i(p'(
Σ ) = /It'
η
), and £
C, for
, which
is
C
as the set of vertices
, we see that
a regular
neighbourhood
^ of
| ^^
j
IP
6.8.6. Corollary. Let ^ presentation
be a regular presentation with a sub-
, Ε a free edge of -^f^ with: attaching membrane A
such that (E, A) is homogeneous in φ) . Then there is a polyhedral equivalence h ·= \(p Ε * \λ^Ε
— > |(p
and which takes
which is identity outside of onto ( ^
·τ
.
/~Note; It is understood that there is a centering V^ a centering of d{(p
,Y| )J7.
Proof; Look at St(
E, d
of Ε * the form
i) Ε
A (P Ε
Let ^
); this is a presentation say
λ
(Ρ
(P
denote the set of vertices of d (p of
F for F < Ε and
to ^ A. Since
and
tj A.
Then
is the join of
is equivalent to a·suspension
'
159
(homogenity of (Ε, A)) with
\λφ Ε
A going to a pole,, we see that
is equivalent to a suspension with
going to a subcone. And Ε
Ε
Ρ
And consider the centering of
(p
IS a cone over
0Ε
Ε
•if·
coming from that of d( (p, η ).
'Thus we have the situation of 6.8.5, and making the necessarysubstitutions in 6.8. 5, we get a polyhedral equivalence ζ/^ of = 0(p'( Σ
[ λ φ Ε I taking ).
ίφ ( ^ >) j
0
(£
) onto
^^φ'ί ^ E)j is just E*. Now observe that the
set of centres of elements of 'iy)· in
φ'
is
Ε "
(This is where we use the fact that Ε is a free edge). Therefore ^ ^
Λ|(Ρ Ί =
U (Γ(Ρ'(Ζ) and (-iyt-lEj)^
So (j^ takes the part of (Jy^"^^) in ('"Vt^ - I E }
in
.
φ'
by patching up with identity outside onto .= Ε
·
Qorollary 6,8t7i
to an. equivalence h of φ>
we see that h
and is identity outside Β
In the same situation, there is a polyhedral
equivalence h' : | (p ^ — ^ A*
onto the part of
is Identity on the base of the cone,
and E'"^ C |(P Ί · Therefore extending
takes
=
(p | which is identity outside
λ ^ Aj , which takes
{e] ^^ onto
- {e, aJ
/ffor this corollary we need only that Ε is a free edge of A, and A is the attaching membrane. Homogenity of (E, A) is not necessary_7. I Proof; This time we call
φ
= St(
A, d
of vertices Yj F, F < A and' F / E. Then is equivalent to a suspension^ with
and
the set
(p^ = "^A - E.
0Α
^ A ~ Ε as the lower hemisphere.
160
Hence
^Α -!ί·
is equivalent to a suspension with
(p^
mapping onto a subcone. J Appljring 6.8.5, we get a polyhedral equivalence
of A ^^
^
1
on itself, which is identity on
^akes
έφ'( Γ ) U A"" onto
X).
Ε is a free edge and A is principal in·-^,
Σΐ) is just
the part of (At - [E, A])'' in A ^^
L^Xp A , and
13 the part of ( - T i l - i n
Ι ^ φ A . Extending
an equivalence h' of |(p A -ίί-
Ti *
to
by patching up with identity outside
^ ) since A'^ is contained in A •«·
h' takes
Since
onto
^ ^ A^
we see that
-[E, A^ )* and is identity outside
Q Thus in the situation of
6 .8.6,
if we take the composition
h' h of the equivalences given by 6.8.6 and 6.8.7, h' ο h takes onto (-^-{E, A]·)^ of h C ®
Λ(Ρ AJ )
Support of h'C ^ ^^^
hence h' ο h fixes, the polyhedron
. This at once gives,
Proposition. If
homogeneously in ^
a polyhedral equivalence of φ takes J ^ * 6.8.9.
support
onto
Corollary;
, then there is
, which is identity on | X^
and
Q If Ν
X homogeneously in P, then any regular
neighbourhood of Ν in Ρ is a regular neighbourhood of X in P. CV Proof of the regular neighbourhood theorem 6.8.1. By 6.8,9 any regular neighbourhood say N' of N is a regular neighbourhood of X. Since Ν is bicoUared in P, there is a polyhedral equivalence h of Ρ taking Ν onto N'. Since XQintp N, h can be chosen to be fixed on X (see 6.4.8). Therefore Ν is a regular neighbourhood of X.
D
161
6.9. Some applications and remarks. In this section we make a few observations about the previous concepts in the context of PL-manifolds 6.9.1. Let Μ be a PL-manifold, ^ Μ its boundary, (p a regular presentation of M. Let E,
ζ (p
<. A and dim A = dim Ε + 1.
(Ε, Λ) is homogeneous in (p if and only if either both Ε and A are in
^ Μ
or both Ε and A are in Μ -
Proof; Let
be a centering of (p . Let E' C ^ a simplex of
3 ^ ) of dimension = dim E, problem is equivalent to:
and A' =
A'
boundary. Μ A
Μ
So again it is possible.
contained in the
If Ε is in "b Μ
and A is in
Hence in this case it is impossible. Q and ^(κ
homogeneously in
homogeneous of collapses from
interchange them i.e. if such that
ai"® subpresentation of (p
. In the sequence of (elementary) to %
the boundary comes before a collapse
can find
A
e' and A' and | Lk(E', d(P )1 is a cell with
in the interior.
-fy^ liy
is a sphere,
If Ε and A are both in ^ M, so are E'
Suppose now that and
If Ε and A are in
and | Lk(E', d(p )\ is a cell, with ^^
so are
NOW the .
equivalent to
E' and A' and | LK(E', d(p ) \
hence it is possible. and
A^ E'.
When is ^ LK(E', d(p )|
a suspension with V^ A going to a vertex? Μ - ^ M , so are
M.
, if a collapse C^ in
G2 in the interior we can
_ J^X
' .'
and the i+1
free edge and attaching membrane of C. and C. ' · _ 1 ο 1 1 , 1 - 1 ,ώ same. Doing this a finite number of times we have
s-re the
162
6.9.2. If Ν ν Χ homogeneously in Μ, then Ν In particular, this is true for regular neighbourhoods.
Some re-
arrangement is possible for the usual elementary collapses also: Ex. 6.9.3. Suppose (p ,.····> (pj^^
, combinatorially, and
1 < i <. k
subpresentations such that (p ^
is obtained from (p . ^ . by an elementary collapse at the free edge with attaching membrane
and
we can find subpresentations (p.', such that
is obtained from
(p = (p ^,
(p^',..,
= (p j^· Then (p^' = (p i (p^'
(P'. ^ by an elementary collapse
at the free edge E' vath attaching membrane A.' ^ and 1-1 1-1 I I ' ' dim A^ ^dim^ ^ , Moreover, except for order, the pairs (E. , A, ) are the same as the pairs (E., Α.). J J More· briefly, we can rearrange the collapses in the order of non-increasing dimension.
Cl
Ex. 6.9.Λ. An n-cell collapses to any (n-l)-cell in its boundary. This follows from 6.5.10. Ex< 6.9.5.
D
An n-cell is collapsible to any point in it.' D We call polyhedron collapsible if it collapses to a point.
Ex. 6.9.5^. A collapsible polyhedron collapses to any point in it. /"Hints
By virtue of ό.·9.3,· it is enough to consider one dimensional
collapsible presentations with the given point as a vertex_7. Q 6.9.6. If Μ is a collapsible PL n-manifold, then Μ is a n-cell. Sketch of the proof;
b-M / 0, for if
^M = 0, there is no free
edge to start the collapsing..· Next we can assume that Μ collapses to a point in Μ - ^ M,- either by 6.9.5 or by 6.9.4 and '6. 5.11. Now
,
163
attach a collar of ^ M
to Μ
(to get PL-manifold M') SO that
all the collapsing is in the interior of M', hence homogeneous. , Now all the conditions of the regular neighbourhood theorem are satisfied. Hence Μ is the regiilar neighbourhood of a print in M', hence an n-cell. CJ The following two remarks will be useful in the next chapter. 6.9.7. Let f : Κ Κ Κ is a K-manifold
M*^ be an imbedding into int M, where fend
an (n-k)-cell. Then f(.K X
can be shrunk into apj given neighbourhood of f(K y, e) in M, for n—k a fixed e ζ- int D fixed on f(K
by an isotopy which can be assumed to be
e). κ Vv e (this follows, for example, ,from
6.5.14 by induction). It is easily seen that f(K X D"""^) is a neighbourhood of f(k y: e) in Μ and is bicollared. tl 6.9.6, Proposition. Let Μ be a PL n-manifold, and Ν a PL (n-1)-manifold in ^ M, and Μ ^N. equivalent to Μ
Then Μ is polyhedrally
I. , Moreover the polyhedral equivalence
h { MCii Ν Λ I, can be so chosen that h(n) = (n,0) for η ζ; N. , Proof5
Such an Ν
cannot be the whole of ^ M. Either
Ν ^ 0,
or Ν is a finite imion of components of ^ M (see 4.4.16). In any case Ν is bicollared in
J M., If N' is regular neighboiH·-
hood of Ν in ^ M, since Ν is bicollared in ό M, N' is polyhedrally-equivalent to Ν (6.4. 8). Since Μ ^.N, there is a regular neighbourhood say A of Ν in Μ such that Μ Ν,Α
(see 6.6.9). Let Λ Π ^ Μ ^ Ν ' .
Then n' is a regular neighbourhood of Ν in ^ M. It is clear
164
that A is polyhedrally equivalent to Ν Β
I. Now attach Β and C,
a collar over ^ Μ - N' and C a collar over N, to Μ
such that
Β Π C = 0. Let the resulting manifold be m'.
c
Consider another collar C^ C C, and the manifolds Λ VJC^ and In M', all the collapses from Μ to A are in the interior and hence Μ
A homogeneously in m', and the collapsing from Δ V Ν
continues to be homogeneous in Μ . Clearly C M'. Thus both A UC^
and M\JC^
Ν homogeneously in
collapse homogeneously in M' to
N, both are neighbourhoods of Ν in M' and both are bicqllared. Hence there is an equivalence A \JC^ ij Μ \JC^. Clearly
C^^N Kl.
Hence Μ Ο C^ C^i Ν χ I, hence Μ ^ Ν X I. To prove the last remark observe that if cC ' N X I is an equivalence such that Μ 'ii^M L)C^
(n, 1) = n, for η ξ M, the equivalence
can be chosen such that it carries η ^N
Finally i:he equivalence A tj C^ y Μ UC^ on Cj.
•
C^
to dC(n,0) ^ C^.
can be assumed, to be identity
165
6. 10. . Conclusion. Now let us, recapitulate briefly the programme for proving the regular neighbourhood theorem: (A) We have a notion of equivalence of pairs (p, X)
(P', x')
J(B) We define a regular neighbourhood of X in Ρ to be any thing equivalent by an auto-equivalence of (P, X) to Ν ζρ (
) , where
subpresentation
is a simplicial presentation of Ρ with a full covering X.
(C) We have the notions of the cone on P, suspension on P, and Ρ y.1; and hence the idea of local collaring, collaring and bicollaring. (D) We can prove; Ρ
is a regiilar neighbourhood
of Ρ Tv 0 in Ρ \\0> 0 · ^h® lower half of the suspension of Ρ is a regular neighbourhood of a pole.
A locally collared subpolyhedron
is collared. Regular neighbourhoods are bicollared. (E) We have for regular presentations, the notion of collapsing, and of homogeneous; and we prove that Ν X/X homogeneously in Ρ if Ν is a regular neighbourhood of X in P. (F) Finally, we prove.the converse, that if Ν V ^
homo-
geneously in P, then a regular neighbourhood of Ν is a regular neighbourhood of X. We pick up a particular regular neighbourhood i
of Ν and shrink it down-a bit at a time to a particular regular neighbourhood of X. In doing this, we need to have proved the theorem for a particular case ; x' is a pole of a suspension p'
166
and Ν
is a subcone of p'. An analysis of the proof shows that we
need the result for various p' of dimension less than that of P. Hence we could have proved this by induction on dimension, although it is simple enough to prove in the special case by construction. Now it should be remarked that precisely the same programme can be carried out in other contexts. A pair
In particular for pairs:
(P, Q) is a polyhedron Ρ with a subpolyhedron
Q ; we say (P^, Q^) Q (fg^ Q2) if P^C If (P,Q)C~(P,, Q )
S "
·'
we define the boundary of the former in the
latter to be (bd Ρ , Q f\ bd Ρ ). P2 1 1 P2 1 Define an equivalence h ! (p^, Q ^ ) — ^ a polyhedral'equivalence qC s P^'ij Pg mapping Q^
(P^, Q^) to be onto Q^.
An admissible presentation of (P, Q) is a pair of regular presentations
C
with
edge of an admissible presentation is a free edge of Ε 6
=
(φ ,
with attaching membrane
~
free
is an Ε ζ-(p , which A, such that af
, then ^ The programme can be carried out mechanically with the
obvious definition of homogeneous collapsing. Finally, we draw some consequences, by applying to PL-manifolds. Let A Q B, where A is a PL a-manifold and Β is a PL b-manifold. We say (B, A) is locally un-knotted if, for every X t-
if (^B J
is polyhedrally equivalent to (L/^'''·
Lj^)
167
for some X. It is possible to show that X must be either a cell /
or a sphere of dimension b-a-1; and that if A is connected^ then either all the X's. are cells_, in which case Λ is locally un-knotted in ^ Β or all X's are spheres, in which case
^ A = A Γ\ ^ B.
It then occurs as in the case of a single manifold, that all the collapsing (i,n the pair sese) which is in the interior of (B, A) is homogeneous, and hence we can prove the following results Let of the sort where
C Δ^'
with ( A >
^ D = D Λ Ji
a locally un-knotted pair
- . . Then if
Δ
\
^
point,
the pair (/i^, D) is an absolute regular neighbourhood of a point (relative to ( b A equivalent to (S ( Δ.»
. ^ D)
and so ( A j D) is polyhedrally
D, D) where S is a (b-a-1)-sphere, i.e.
is un-knotted. /"This is a key lemma for Zeeman's theorem, that
(b - a)
^^^^^^ ( Δ 3
is un-knotted.
combinatorial Topology", Chapter IV, pp.
See Zemman "Seminar on
168
Chapter VII Regular collapsing and applications 7- 1. Let
be a simplicial presentation.
outer edge of then
^
, if there is a
, and dim Δ
)> dim
having ^
. In this case =f
, η;-
are of the form
in otherwords they consist of
is a subpresentation of ^
Let dim
,
·
, and
n. Then, we say that
is obtained from and
«
If /Λ =
/ from
τ' ^ Τ •
CT <6~>
by an elementary regular collapse (n) with outer edge ma.ior simplex
ί ^^L·
0. The elements
Cf' τ''
^
is an
is uniquely
as a face are exactly of the form
The remaining faces of
(Γ
Z^ /f , such that if cT^
fixed by ς— , and is of the form of
We say that
=
J and
is obtained
X _ by an elementary reg\ilar collapse (n), we say that /o
regularly collapses (n) to ^ ^ . The elements of the theory of regular collapsing can be approached from the point of view of "steller subdivisions" ( c.C«f. Section 13 of "simplicial spaces, nuclei and mr-groups" or the first few pages of Zeeman's "unknotting spheres", Annals of Mathematics, 72, (1960) 350-361), but for the sake of novelty we shall do something else.
169
7.1.1. Recalling: .Notations. simplexes. (5r ί Τ and ^ ζ- >
^
^
, usually denote open
' · · denote their closures (closed simplexes),
J .. their boundaries. The simplicial presentation,
of ζΤ consisting of ^ of
>^
and its faces is denoted by
consisting of faces of C
by' ^C~|(see 4.0·
for the join of the two open simplexes defined.
If
and
and that Τ stands
, when the join is
is a 0-simplex and χ is the unique point of
we will write jx^
^
for ς- C^ . On the other hand the join of two
polyhedra Ρ and Q when it is defined is denoted by Ρ ^^ Q. Similarly the join of two simplicial presentations φ ) and it is defined is denoted by (p * (3^ . For example if g" defined, then
when is
is the canonical simplicial presentation
of the polyhedron
^ 5~
Τ . If Ρ is a polyhedron consisting of
a single point x, we will sometimes write χ * Q instead of Ρ * Q. With this notation {^Χ^ΙΓ" and χ Let A
^
be an (n-1 )-simplex, I = [o, l"^, and let J^ be
a simplicial presentation of Ρ t
are the same.
such that the projection
— ^ -Δ i® simplicial with reference to The n-simplexes of
face
(\
That is Δ
intersects the
^ is a face of T^ ^, Ή ^ has another
which maps onto Δ. ,
is a face of "P j · • · · j ^ . 1 2 1—1 has another face that maps onto
» is a face of
Λ,
, but T^ i i call it Δ ^ and so on. We start with with Λ k =
.
can be ordered as follows:
T ^ 1 ^•••'"P^ J so that if Χζ-Δ» X in order.
and " Δ
Δ
1.
= Δ
° ^^^
^P
170
Let us write Τ = Λ Κ Ο y ( ^ be just ^
= ς- ^ in some way. Let ^ ) % 1. (If
=
should be taken to
7\ 0). Then there is a subpresentation ^ ^
of
which
covers T, 7.1.2, Lemma. (With the above hypotheses and notation) collapses (n) to ^
regularly
.
Proof; We in fact show that there is a sequence of regular collapses with major simplexes
XT' , We must then define 1
k S
.... u i r , ^
and find some outer edge lying on ^ .j so that the corresponding regiilar collapse results in / ^ i-1 Now
^ is an n-simplex and its projection
is an
(n-1)-simplex, therefore there are two vertices v^ and v^ of
^
(choose v^ , V2 so that the I-co-ordinate of v^ is
the
I-co-ordinate of v^) which map into one vertex ν of Δ
. Now
l\ = ^ ^ and so ν - is a vertex of either ζ"" or "T" , Case 1; ν is a vertex of
be the faces of
. lying over
and the two faces of r and Define
, Write
and
. Then
| ' . which are mapped onto Δ ,
^v^j
tT^ = [v^J
= {v\ ζ"^, Let ^J
I --vf
,
^
- Aj^
·
. Τ^^Ι^,^
%
are
and^
171
It is claimed that if we take ^
_ as an outer edge then the result
of the elementary regular collapse with major simplex
^CT
^ in
cannot be in ^
)< I which is in ^
a vertex of
C., 1
; because the only (dim
is
j ^ind
/
since v^ is
Also Ίρ . is the only simplex among 1 *
which contains v^ as a vertex. Hence if We then have to show that
The first term here is
"p.
^ p^j then A/'^il
)-simplex
ί · · j T^. I 1 ΤΓΛ ^^ ^ * i'
~
. > which is where "P. intersects Ρ
υ., or,.
172
The second term written slightly differently is
v^ v^
ψ
to which we may add a part of the first term namely ("^ΓΓ^Γ*) to obtain all faces of J*^ ^ which map to == ^ {[v] r M
Τ
- ( ^ ^ ^) υ
Τ L^
^
* v^
In other words, this This shows that
and so edge
i
^^
i 1
elementary regular collapse with outer
and major simplex t
Case 2; ν is a vertex of ff . Write to be faces of "P ^ lying over ^
ν
and
, define In this case
and the two faces of "P ^ which are mapped on Δ
and [v^} r
Τ
-
^
are
Δ -
We now define
and make computations as before. cl ^ i ^^ T i ^^ —
i
U K
- Δι., υ
w
-
( V2 ^^ i Γ
/
δ Γ - { j , - Ο *
χΛ
^^ T7
'Τ
1
'
'^t , 'X'
173
and
^ [y^ V2I ''
^
^
[( Sr^i-'T)
TU ^ ^ τ
jjJJJ^^ \s>
r Ίβ
And this shows that if we perform an elementary regular collapse (n) on Λ we get / %
g" . and major simplex "P.}
. Hence Define
and Τ = iC
. with outer edge
regularly collapses (n) = I,
to Κ I, T^ = 0 C
=
0) U (T X iC"· t
D Q
.
α
k
I t is easy to see that T^^ is a (k-l)-cell in Q I , k and is the set o f points of is zero.
I
at least one co-ordinate of which
^et
^ :
=
V
Τ —>
^ b^- the projection.
^.1.3. LcHFia. L't Jj^ ' /f
' · · · ' /q simplicial presenΊ >•··, I vith rf^sp'ct to which all the maps
tations of l", l''^ c/j
ί. . . , Χοί
% n
> ^ n - 1 '··' 2JI
and such that
firr simolicial.
Then there exist subpresentations
covering T^,
T, respectively,
^ regularly collapses (i) to ^
Proof; The proof is by induction.
. for all i.
It is easily verified that
^
collapses (1) to ^ ^, So, inductively, we know that for i < n-1. Now ^ ^ ^ covering y^ 0 ^
. collapses (i) to ^ ^ ,
is just the subpresentation of
η I Vs I = Τ . n-1 1 η Let the collapsing of X to ^ occur along the / 0 n_ 1 n-1 major simplexes 3 · · • 3 Δ. · Then we define ^ k
and write
^ ' where ^ is the outer edge of i i i i the regalar collapse (n-l) from to Q ^ . Then Ai
nlOVi.il Define 0 plus ^
=
• ^ = the subpresentation of ^ 1 ). Thus β
,- ^
covering and
= ^
We mil shovr that (j^ _ regularly collapses (n) to (j^
, stringing these together, then
regularly collapses (n)
175
To show that (J^ . rei?;ularly coll-'^pses (n) to (j^ it i ^ i +1 is enoufih to look at the part of
. covering J^
Δ,χι. A. X I and cL ^
( Δ . ) i·®.
Λ,Α 0 U[c 6 T i - T . ^ i ]
Aj_ X ^
^^^ projection
Δ .X ^ — ^
is simplicial with reference to the subpresentation of ^ ^ ^ I and
·^·
for this situation.
Δ^
which
^ covering
leama 7.1.2 is especially tailored
Q
7-1.4. Theorem. Let A be a n-cell, Β an n-cell in
A, and |p
a regular presentation of A. Then there is a simplicial presentation refinin^:^ ^
, with a subpresentation ^
^regularly collapses (n) to ^
covering B, such that
.
Proof; There is a polyhedral equivalence
h ίA
^ l", with
h (B) ^ t". Then h is simplicial with reference to some φ ^ and , where ^ η
Χ
I
can be assumed to refine
η
, n-1
> 1
. The diagram
<^2
^ ιI
...
can be triangulated by simplicial presentations ^
,•'·,
can be ass^amed to refine (3^ . By 7.1.3?
regularly
collapses (n) to ^ ^^ ? the subpresentation of
regularly (η) to
covering T^. collapses
Q
Suppose that
is a simplicial presentation of an
n-cell A, regularly collapsing (n) to (n-O-cell in
^ Λ
Therefore the isomorphic presentation
where
, ( l*^!) = B, an
A. Let the intermediate stages be
=Λ
1' · · ·"
A k ^
'Zi'
176
where )(
is obtained from /\
outf-r
by a reKul'tr collapse (n) at
, and major simplex Δ ^ - ^ ^ TTi' W' define th' uppnr bcoridarv of ^
. as follows:
upper boundary of /'ζ ^ = 0 ( j A ^j)-interior (
^
upper boundary of A ® i+1 - (upper boundary of/^^ -
^Ti^^^^i^^i'
It can be alternatively defined as follows: Upper boundary of ^ = unions of closur&s of (n-O-cells Ε o f ^ Ε ^ ^
, , such that if
, Ε is the face of exactly one n-simplex of
Ε ζ ^^
and if
then Ε is the face of no n-simplex of Now we would like to assert that
7. 1.
(a) The upper boundary of
^ is an (n-l)-cell, with constant
boundary ^ ( (2^1). The upper boundary of the last stage is j^S} · (b) Λ . intersects the upper boundary of precisely ^ i along
*
boundary of
· In particul r
^
cannot be in the upper
. for any i, hence can never be in
If in 7.1.3, in each column w= do the collapsing as described in 7.1.2, the above assertions can be verified in a straightforward manner, by using similar properties of
^ and an analysis of
the individual steps in 7.1.2. The general case seems to be more cumbersome
(A proof is given in the appendix). But the special case
is enough for our purposes, namely for the next theorem, the main result of this chapter. 1
First using 7.1-5, we define a polyhedral equivalence from the upper boundary of
. to the upper boundary of / ζ · .
^ by
177
φ = identity outside •1 :ind on map
^
1
5" .
^
i ? ^^
join of the identity-
^ T . to th'·- map of centre of f i i
to the centre of
r . . Thus from
6 \
|^
oG
^o
| ^ \ , we reach by simpli-
cial moves, never disturbing the boundary of 7.1.6.
Theorem. Let D be a (k+l)-cell contained in the interior
of an n-cell/i\ . Let ^
.
δ D = E, U
= ^ E^ ; let X C Δ
Then there is an isotopy of
>
two k-cells,
^^ ^ polyhedron such that X f\ D ^ ^E^. > fixed on X U ^ Δ
> taking,
E^
onto E^. Proof:
Consider
to be a standard n-cell, we can suppose that
Δ
C.
and triangulate the whole picture, so that there are subpresentations covering D, X. Refine the subpresentation covering D, to which regularly collapses (Κ + l) to ^ to the whole of
, to say ^
,
which covers E^· Extend
. Let the intermediate stages
of the collapsing be
Λ= obtained from
A) '•··' Ap^
'
^ by an elementary regular collapse (k+l)
at out f- 'ige
. r^nd major simplex
=
.
· ·
Wr. will find ?ri isotony takinr the upp&r boundary of to the uopp.r bound- ry of J^ ,
, and fix^d except in a c-rtain n-cll
i+1
to b'- dfscribod. is η (k+1j-simplex contained in the comDlement of X, which is also covered by a subpresentation of (p · So if take Σ Now "Ρ
.
^
- "n. c Δ , and ( Σ - Ρ
Χ must be contained in
only part of
^
=ηπχ.
>
this is the
^ which 'could contain points in ^ E^. Let s and t
be the centres of
^^
and
C^ ., the line segment
prolonged a little bit (here we use the fact that A
[s, t^
can be
is standard) to
V and w in ί\ , so that
(^[v, w ]
^ t''
( i)
a Τ J
"^ ^
δ
Γλ X c ^
^^
(Λ
c)T.
boundary
(here we use the fact th 't if L C\ (c" ii- K^C L Γ\Κ, where
is a I
simplex and K, L arf polyhedra, then there is a stretching i.r.
containing- ^
we have in order f of
s, t,
w^ , taking ν to
to the identity on outside of
such that L Γ\
jV, w^
^
^ δ ^^ ^^
^^ K ^ Q K Γ\ΐ). Thus
and there is a polyhedral equivalence v, s to t and v; to w. Join f c) Tj " Σ. "
extend by identity 5
to the the unper ofisotopy and takes th- upper boundary of is resultboundary of a nice
^i .
179
The composition of the h^, will then take the upper boundary of
= E^ to the uppT boundary of
7.1.7· Kem?rk; In theorem 7.1.0, PL-manifold. Of course Ex. 7. '.8»
^ = E^ . Q
can be replaced by any
D should be in the interior. Q
If Ν and Μ are two PL-manifolds and f: Ν ><. I — i n t Μ
an imbedding, show that there is an isotopy of Μ carrying f(N
O) to f(N Κ 1 U
in M, and Χ Π ί"(Νχ leave X fixed,
fixing '5 Μ and
If X is a polyhedron the isotopy can be chosen to
D
7.2. Applications. 7.2.1. Definition. Let S be an n-sphere, and ^ ^ a k-sphere in S. The pair (S,^ ) is said to be unknotted if (S, ^ polyhedrally equivalent to (X * ^
) is
) foi" some X.
X must of course b^ an (n-k-1)-sphere. Clearly a pair equivalent to an unknotted pair is again unknotted. . 7.2.2. Proposition. Let S be an n-sphere, and
a k-sphere in
S. If there exists an (n-k-1 )-cell D in S such that D'^s-XC^» then (S, "Σ. ) is unknotted. Proof; D say Δ
^
is an n-cell, and so the closure of S - D
, is again an n-cell and b Δ -
^ (D ^^ ^
Then S is polyhedrally equivalent to a suspension of hence (S, X. ) is equivalent suspension of 0 D.
(X * Σ1 J X
X. ,
) = ^ D ^^ X. . δ D * Σ1 j
) where X is a
D
7.2.3. Corollary. If ^
is a regular presentation of an n-sphere S,
and a a (k+l)-cell in (p , then (S, ^ A) is unknotted.
Proof; Takr in 7.2.2.
D - ^ ^ (p ^^ ^ (w.th resp'^ct to some centering of φ) ) Q
7.2. Α., Proposition.
If a k-sphere ^
bounds Ί (k + l)-cpll
D
containrii in thf- interior of a PL-m.?ni fold M, then therf ir? =n isotopy of Μ taking?
^
onto th^ boundary of a (k + 1 )-cell of some
regular presentation of M, Proof: Take a regular presentation (p of Μ in which D is covered by a full sub pre sent at ion
. Consider a k-cell Ε of
and the (k+l)-cell, say A of Let
^A - Ε = E^
and
in ^ D
, which contains it in its boundary.
5 D - Ε = F^
and D - A = D'. Then D
is a (k+l)-cell with boundary E^ (j E^ and Ε intersect D
in
^ E^ = ^ E^· Hence by theorem 7.1.6, there is an isotopy of Μ taking E^ onto E^ and fixing E. Thus moved onto
ό ^ will be
5 A.
7.2.5. Corollary. Lf-.t 5 be an n-sphere, and 3. (S, X
^
a k-sphere in
) is unknotted if and
only if Σ. bounds a (k+l)-cell in S. Proof; The necessity is clear. 7.2.3.
Suf/'iciency follows from 7,2. A and
Q Motivated by 7.2.A, we define a k-sphere ^
interior of a PL-manifold Μ to be unknotted
in the
if it bounds a
181
(k+l)-cell in (the interior ο-Τ') Μ. From 7.2.4 it is clear that 7.2. ϋ. If ii is a (k-^l)-cell of soraf, regulor presentation of M, and
C int
then
is unknotted.
If
^ and
two unknotted sph<-res in the same component of M, there is an isotopy of Μ which takes 2 1
onto 1
Keeping
Μ
fixed,
Q
2
7.2.7. Definition. If D is an n-cell and Ε
a k-cell in D, with
"^D C ^ Ε-, (D, E) is said to be unknotted if (D, E) is polyhedrally equivcdent to (X
E, E) for some X.
Since Ε ic not completely contained in
D, such an X
must be an (n-k-1)-sphere. i>nd we define a cell Ε in the interior of a PL n-manifold Μ to be unknotted, if there is an n-cell D in Μ such that
(D, E) is unknotted.
containing Ε
cell which is the closure of an
open convex cell of some regular presentation of Μ is clearly unknotted. Given ajny two unknotted cells D^ and D^ of the same dimension in M, there is an isotopy of Μ leaving ^ Κ
fixed and
taking D^ onto U^. Given two unknotted k-cells D^ and
D^ in
a PL n-manifold M, k < n, D Γ\ D^ = 0, then there is a n-cell A ' ' 1 2 ' containing D^ and D^ in D and such that the triple (A, D^, D2) is equivalent to a standard triple.
In particular if k ^ n-2, from
the standard situation, we see that there is a (k+l)-cell· A in int Μ containing orientations on D^ next chapter.
D^ and D^ in ^ A and inducing chosen gna D^. These remarks will be used in the
Now, as a corollary of 7.2.5, if ^ C
η ^ are k and
182
, η
k.
η-spheres and η ^ 2k +2, then (S , χ
) is unknotted.
case η ^ 2k + 1 is a little inore difficult.
The next
Actually η - k ^ 3
is enough. But this vd]l be proved only in the next chapter. Here we sketch a proof of the.case η - 2k + 1, 7-2.8. Proposition. Let S be an n-spher^, ^ η = 2k + 1, and k!?^ 2. (S, X
a k-sphere in S,
) is unknotted.
Sketch of the proof; By 7.2.5 it is enough to show that a
bounds
(k+l)-cell in S, To prove this it is enough to show that a
k-sphere in
bounds a (k+l)-cell. Consider a k-sphere Ρ 2k + 1 and let ^^ be a simplicial presentation of P. If ^ in m 2k+i and ^ are two ( ^ k)-dimensional siraplexes in and L ^ and L ^ the linear manifolds generated by them, ς" is defined 2k+1 if and only if i^iven any point χ f jp^ , there is at most one line through χ meeting L ^ and L cr Consider L =ϋ"Γ L, t(p J for which 5"
L
the linear manifold generated by
is ^
The dimension of all such L, is open and dense in (f^
— i ^ 2k, hence
2k + 1 (p, -L
. B y the above remark, if we take any
point X (; \JL , then for any ( line through χ meets
defined, r
and
, Τ ), ^ ^(p ,
^ (P , at most one
, that is, at most a finite number
of lines through χ meet Ρ more than once. But each of these finite number lines through χ may meet Ρ more than twice. By similar arguments using triples ' can get an op'-^n dense s^ t
(CjTjf 2k+1
η I such that if x
VA^ ?
only a finite numbrr of lines meet Ρ more than once, and each such
183
meets Ρ exactly twice, liow vre choose such a point x; let L^,..., be the lines throut'h χ which meet Ρ at two points. On each L^, call thf: point on Ρ nearer to χ consider the set
N^ . If
as KK, and the other F^, and we can put N^ ,.·•,
is a 1-cell in Ρ not meeting B'^. Lrt Ν be a regular neighbourhood of that 1-cell in P. We can choose Ν so that Ν is a k-cell and (its complement in P) say F X ->'• Ν is a (k+l)-cell, ς)(χ
F^ 4 ^
fo^ ^.ll i.
is another k-cell
N) = Ν \Jx * C)N, and F meets
X * N, exactly in ^ N. Hence by theorem 7.1.6, here is an isotopy of
taking Ν onto χ
now (x
N)UF
Ρ
c) Ν and keeping F fixed. But
is the boundary of the (k + l)-cell χ •»· F. Since
is moved to (x * b N) U F by an isotopy, Ρ also bounds some
(k+l)-cell.
α
184
App,.nJix tu Ch&ptf^r VII In the theory of regular collapsing, let us add the following operation (due to J.K. C. ^'"litehead;; -ΊΒΟ namely the oocration of removing c principal simplex (open) •fr^m a sinplicial presentation. This is called "perforation", if and J^
is obtained from
vdll say that " i", or more briefly
is a siraplicial presentation,
ty removing a principal i-simplex, we
' is obtained from "
by a perforation of dimension
is obtained from
by perforation (i)".
If in the definition or recrular collapsing, we did not put tha restriction that the dimension of the major simplex should be greater than that of the outer edee, then perforation also v:ould come under regular collapsing.
Since regular collapsing as defined in 7.1 does not change
the homotopy type (even the simnle homotopy type), where as perforation does, we prefer to distinguish them. A. 1. Let
C . b e simplicaal presentation^such that
contained from edee
J^
is
by an elerrentary reg-jlar collapse (n) at outer
and major simplex Δ a)
=
Let Ρ
- Lk(f ,/V) if
b) If
Λι'· Then
is not a face of Z\ .
then Lk(P,A,') is obtained from ,>4) t>y a perforation of dimension (n-dim|^ -l),
c) If f < A and GT ^ ^
, then LkC'f' ,/!') is
obtained from Lk(p,/^) by an elementary regular collapse of dimension
(n-dimp -l). •
The verification is easy. The only faces of not covered by (b) and (c) above are of those in
-
which are , that is
185
those which contain ^ a s faco. Of cours- these do not appear in SuppoEi
collaps-.s regularly ''n) to ^
.
. If f ^ -
,
ρ hss to disaopsar in somr^ collapse; 1ft us lenotf the. major simplpx of thR rr-pular collapsc- (,η) in which ρ is r-rrovird by
If
I (5~p· is the outer edr·;? of the particalc.· collaps- , then (5~p ^ ^ . What all is left of Lk( f ,
at this sta^p is ^^^(p ' {_ Δρ]"^ ·
this notation, usin^^ A.I, we havr pasily the followinRS A. 2)
a) If p ^ ^ S . then Lk( p Lk(p·
is obtained from
by perforations and regular collapses
of dimension (n-dim p -l). b) If p ^ /{-2B , th.-n LkCp,
) is obtained
from i-ikCj^j/^) by perforations and regular collapses of dimension (n-dim Let (j^ obtained from
Q
(SV^'- simplicial presentations and suppose (j^ is by regular collapses and perforations of dimension i.
Then we can rearrange the operations so that perforations come first and regular collapses later. This is easily seen by considering one oerforation and one regalr^r collapse.
If the perforation comes after
the regul'-'r collapse, ν;.· c3n revers·^ tVie ord^r; of course the converse is not true. 3y -! finite nurab'^-r of such changes, we can perform the •oer'forations first and the regul^ir collapses later, so that the end result is still (β . If ΙΟί^ΐ^ a connected PL(i)-manifold, the effect of a perforation (i) upto homotopj'- type is the same as removing a point from the interior of \
. Since a regular collapse does not
change the homotopy t,•\φc, we have A. 3) If is a connected i-manifold, and(j^ is obtained from
6
by k perforations (i) and certain elementary regular collapses (i), then
has the same homotopy type as
removed.
In particular if ^0\.j is
v.dth k interior points
i-crll then ((^ has the homotopy
type of a wedge of k spheres of dimension (i-l). If (Xi is a i-sphere then|(|^| has the homotopy typr of a v/edge of (k-1 )• spheres of dimension (i-1). D Of course, in the above when i - 1 , the wedge of O-spheres has to interpreted properly. That is we should take the wedge of k 0-spheres to be be just a point.
(k+1) distinct points, in particular if k = 0 to Suppose \ Olj is a i-cell, and
type as point, for example when
is a i-cell or an (i-l)-cell.
Then there cannot be any perforations. there is exactly one perforation.
has the homotopy
If 0L| is a cell and
If
= ^jOlj,
a i-sphere and
an(f
1-cell in it, again, there is exactly one perforation. It should be remarked, that all the above statements are made for the sake of proving Lemma 7.1.5 to which we proceed now. Let us first recall the definition of the upppr boundary.
Consider/^ ,
a simplicial presentation of an n-cell A regularly collapsing (n) to
J where
= Β is an (n-1 )-cell in
A. Let the individual
stages be
Ji where
=
^^ is obtained from
at outer edge
1
>
. by an elementary regular collapse(n)
and major s i m p l e x =
hypothesis for the rest of the appendix). (denoted by^^/^^j^))
> ^ ( T h i s is the Then the upper boundary of/^^
is defined inductively as follows:
1
b (Λ,ΙΧ) =
-ΙϊδΡ
^ (λ,Μ
•
The troublf i^th this definition is that it is not clear that it is well defined, e.g. that ζ" ^
So we consider the following:
ό'(ΛΛΧ). u U that (l) if eC: of/^^
Ε is an (n-1)-simplex of
such
then Ε is the face of exactly one n-simplex
(2) if Ε t^fi then Ε is the face of no n-simplex of
We claim that
^(/ζ.
^
j J^^· To begin with they are
equal, that is when i = 1, Suppose they are equal for i. Then we will show that they are equal for i + 1 also. In ^^(/^ilSS ) /^i+llSs all the
changes can be from faces of
(n-1 j-simplexes in
since
^^^
Now
have to be in
is the only n-simplex of J^^ having them as faces. So by
induction ^^
^^^
^ +1
is really in ^ '^one of the
consider
(n-1 )-simplexes of
in this, since they are not in
the only n-simplex of
is
The (n-1 )-simplexes of
have to be in (n-O-simplex Ε of^^
^^^^^
)· For, consider any If
is i n ,
then
is
having Ε as face, sinco that is removed
there is no n-simplex of Λ .
having Ε as a face. If Et
there are two n-simplexes in/^ having Ε
as a face. One of them ^ ^
is removed. The other should he In Λ , since otherwise Ε cannot ' « i+r
be removr-d in any of the later collapses. Thus ^(5". """ . i? in __ I i i (J ( + )· Since wp tiav^ accounted for all the (n-l)-faces of thPse are thr only changes from ^ '(/^^(όζ) to ^ '(/J^ + J ^ )> that is
Hence by induction
^ and
^ ^ coincide for all ±, and ^
is well
defined.
k.U Proof: Suppose Either
6
T. C
2|)·
There are four possibilities:
Β
or
(2)
or
(3) T i C Β - ^B
or
(Z.) T i C A - ^ A.
Q^ Β
Φ
By A.2 in cases (2) and (3)
•
) is obtained from
'^y perforations and regular collapses of dimension (n-dim
- l). In cases (l) and ω
notation of A.2) is obtained from M X , Λ
{Ac^.^) (with the ) by perforations and
regular collapses of dimension (n-dim ^ ^ - 0·
By A. 3 and remarks
thereafter, there cannot be any perforations in cases (l) and (2) and there is exactly one perforation in cases (3) and (4). By A.I; b) in the collapse at outer edge ^ ^ simplex ^ ^ =
^ . , what happens to Lk( T.
and major exactly a
189
perforation of dLmension (n-dim TiC
- Β or T ^
- 0·
So straightaway -WP. have
is impossible.
So, the only possibilities that remain are (3) and {h). Let us consider case (4) first.
We claim that if
the one perforation on LkC"^^,
) is already made. Since
is a sphere, any (n-1)-simplex of face of two n-simplexes. So For the same reason, ^ Lk( T i , Ji^) =
^ ([_
having 'X . as a face must be the
. cannot be in
^ cannot be in any ^ ., /i^). Thus
Lk( Ti'/^i) ^ i'^'^f i
with
Qd
implies
Suppose Lk(
) is changed for the
first time in the k.^*^ collapse, k. 1
that is Lk(
1
,^ ) = ^ i
is a sphere; this operation from
M^.,
yi) = MX.,
i 1 is necessarily a perforation.
Lk(
A, ) to i k^ So the one perforation
i on L k C ' ^ ^ , i s already made. But in the i^^ collapse also what happens to Lk(
j^) is a perforation since
A. 1.b). Since this is impossible
^^
~^ ^ ^
cannot be in A _ ^ A.
Let us consider the remaining possibility (3), ^ ^ C ^ -"bB. ' LkCc^^,/^)^ is an i-cell with boundary Τ iC
Lk(
wc have to show that Τ iC ^ " ^ ^ i®
The case when dim
impossible.
^ = n-1 is easily disposed of, since in that case
there is no n-simplex having not in ^ (/^JSs) and
as a face. As in case (4) cannot be in ^
( ^
) ii"
^ is
190
" Lk(fT.i/|.). hr^s to be a perforation.
W i n , the first operation on
For, all the outer edges of Lk(T.)/^
in
and a regular collapsp of Lk(
of
Thus Cj-^ ^
^) removes a part
) implies that the one perforation
on LkC'^f^^, β^^) is already done.
But then thf result of the i^*^
collapse ν,ΙΙΙ be^gain a perforation on ^ ^=
^ cannot be in ό
for any i. Q
With the hypothesis of Λ.4, 0
constant boundary
(n-l)-cell vdth boundary =
assume that
"S^Ail^s)·
B. Inductively,
(/^^ί^) is an (n-l)-cell vdth boundary ^ B. By k.U,
'^i Τ i
is an (n-l)-cell with
(l^^l) = (3 B.
Proof;
particular it cannot be in b B. Since Aj^ 3S)> no simplex of J^ having ^ ^ So^r.
intersects
Cp ^ : Identity outside^ (Γ^ ^ ^ a n d the join of the identity map on the centre of
)) =
.
^ to the centre of
equivalence; hence ^ b
by A. I.b) since
this is again impossible. Thus
A.
^ire
as a face can be in
J^s) precisely along
on ^ ^
is
and the map which carries ^ is clearly a polyhedral
) is an (n-1)-cell. To see that i+1 (/S.^^lXO), observe that the part of
(if any) which is in h id
^
1^)) should be in ^ ()" .. Since i i 1 γ ^ is identity on this part, both the cells have the same boundaries.il.
191
Chapter VIII Handles and s-cobordism 8.1. Handles. A handle of dimension η and index k, briefly called a (n,k)-handle, (cV a k-handle) is a pair (H, Τ) consisting of an n-cell Η and (n-1)-manifold
Τ of
H, such that there is a poly-
hedral equivalence f :
Η
A *Β
where A is a (k-1)-sphere, Β a (n-k-1)-sphere, and
f(T) a regular
neighbourhood of A in A * B. We denote handles by lower case script letters, as and so on. Given a handle (H, Τ) as above, we call Τ the attaching tube and
Η - Τ the transverse tube of the handle. The polyhedral
equivalence where φ
f in the definition can be so that f(T) ==
;A* Β
0, 1
When this is so, f VA)
is the join of A
^ 0 and Β
^ 1
is called an attaching sphere and f'^CB) a
transverse sphere of the handle. The pair (H, ^ Η - Τ) is clearly a handle of dimension η and index n-k. It is called the dual of (H, T), and denoted by (H, T)' The cone on X is denoted by G(X). standard mistake, C(A
V/e know that, by a
B) ^ C(A) Κ C(B). This equivalence will make
Cp~V[0, gl) correspond to A>C.(C(BJ). Therefore, in defining a handle, we could require, in place of f, the existence of a polyhedral
192
eauivalRnce ς :Η^ D
Δ,
wnere D is a k-crll, Δ an (n-kj-cell, and where
Γ(Τ) =
V/ith this formuiation. for ^ny e in the interior of Δ j then
Oo A e
is an attaching spnure; and for any f in the interior
of D, then f χ^Δ (D X A ,(
ie a transverse sphere, in the handle If e
int
, we call D )C e a core of the
handle. If e ζ- Δ , we call D y. e a boundary core or a surface core of the handle. Similarly transverse cores are defined, and the definitions can be extended to arbitrary handles by using an equivalence with the standard handle (so that even in the standard handle, we have "more" cores than defined above). Note that there is no uniqueness about attaching spheres, transverse spheres and cores in a handle, only the attaching tube and the transverse tube are fixed. Ex. 8. 1. 1.
If Η is an n-cell, and S a (k-O-sphere in ^ H,
S is an attaching sphere of some (n,k)-handle
(H, T) if and only if
S is unknotted in ^ H. D We have the following two extreme cases of (n,k)-handles: If (H, T) is a (n,0)-handle there is no attaching sphere (T = 0), ^ H is the transverse tube as well as the transverse sphere. Any point in the interior of Η can be considered as a core. If (H, Τ) is a (n,n)-handle,
Η is the attaching tube as well as the attaching sphere,
the whole of Η is the core.
Also, note that for an (n,1)-handle,
the attaching tube consists of two disjoint
(n-l)-cells.
193
Ν- ^
" X
.
X U ( 3, \ ) -
m
3, "i- ) - k c w s i k oU ^bJC
8.2. Relative n-manifolds and their handle presentations. Λ relative n-manifold is a pair (M, X), I Q M , such that for every a ^ Μ - X, the link of a in Μ is either an (n-l)-cell or an (n-1)-sphere. If (M, X) is a relative n-manifold, ^ (M, X) denotes the set of points of Μ - X whose links are cells. is not a polyhedron, but are polyhedra; so that
^ (M, X) (J X
compact set in "b in ()(M,X).
and ^ (M,X) -B(M,X)L) (ΧΓ\ b (M,X
(6(iM,X)UX, X) and ( b (M,X), X ^
X = XΓ* b (M,X) ) are relative
(M, X)
(where
(n-1)-manifolds without boundary. Any
is contained in an (n-1 )-manifold contained
I9i
Wc sometimes denote a relative manifold
(M,X) by Gothic
l-tt^r such as-Jn\, , and b (M,X) by'^-'lTt. If (H,X) is a relative n-manifold, and A an n-manifold, such that Λ Γ\ Μ ^ ^Aa5(M,X) is an (n-1 )-raanifold, then it is easily proved that (using, of course, theorems on cells in spherrs etc..) that (M
A, X) is a relative n-manifold. As in the case of the
manifolds, we have the following proposition; 8.2.1. Proposition. Let (M,X) be a relative n-manifold, C an n-cell such that Cf\M = ^CA"b(M,X) is an (n-l)-cell. Let
be any
neighbourhood of C r>M in M. Then there is an equivalence f : (M,X) ^ which is identity outside "λλ .
(MUC,X)
D
Let Β C ^ A, and f : Β — >
f(B) C ^ (•'''ijX))
Μ be an embedding with
and Β an (n-1)-manifold. Then there is an identi-
fication polyhedron ML^ A; and with the obvious convention of not distinguishing notationally between X and its image in (MU A), we have (MW A,X) is a relative n-manifold, which wr shall say is obtained from (M,X) by attaching
(A, B) by an embedding
f. Of
course, doing all this rigorously involves abstract simplicial complexes, their realizations and proper abuse of notation; and we assume that this is done in each case without mention. Let Λ^ϊί = (Μ,Χ) be a relative n-manifold, and I 1
i. be (n,i)-handles, ρ , when Ρ 1) H^ = 0
. ^ (H., T.). We speak of τ τ 1
195
2) Η^Π i'l = Τ^ζ^^ϊ^τ, for all i. by In such 5 c£Sf^definition, 1 'ind v: say that'^f '" + ρ
^p ^
- (Μ'ΟΗυ .. \jH , X). 1 Ρ
· •
obtained from-ΠίΤζ. by attaching
(n,i)-handles Qy ρ i-handles. Also if WP have f. : T^
and f^ (T^) Γ\ i'j^^j) =
embeddings for i = Ι,.,.,ρ
i / j, we may look at what w- obtain
from -HiTt by attaching tt ^ ..... ^
'
i
result w e denote by^VYl U 70 U . f^ 1
by the maps f ,..., f . The
'\J fl i fp
and say that i t i s obtained
ρ
from AYt by attaching ρ (n,i)-handles by imbeddings f.. 8.2.2. Definition, k handle presentation of a relative n-manifold (M,X) is a (n+2)-tuple = -'"n^' 1) xC/v_^C . .. C \ = ^^
polyhedra such that,
2) 3) (Α^,χ)
^ relative n-manifold for all i
h) For each i, there exist finitely many handles of index i
,
,
, such that i
It follows from 3) and h) that X in M, A ^ \ X implies that
is a neighbourhood of
A_^VN, for some regular neighbour-
hood Ν of X in Μ (see Chapter VI). We can even assume that Ν C int^A_^. Now if Β -
then
- Ν
B, hence is a collar
196
over Β. Thus thfr^ is an eqidvalencr of
to Ν which fixes X;
that is polybodrally Λ ^ jast looks like a rrgular neighbourhood of X in M. Consider a relative n-manifold
(M,X) where
FL n-manifold, and X a PL (n-1J-manifold in
M.
is 3
Such a relative
manifold, we term a special case. If (M,X) is a special case, and (A -'
A ) is a handle presentation of (M,X), then clearly η moreover the equivalence can be assumed to carry χ to
(x,o) for X t X. 8.2.3. Theorem. Every relative manifold has a handle presentation. Proof; Let
= (M,X) be a relative n-manifold; let φ
be a regular
presentation of Μ with a subpresentation 7C covering X. With a centering
Y^ of φ
, we define the derived subdivision '^((pj'^) »
and some derived subdivision d (p
of d ((p , ^^
C^-- = ( St(^C, d^(p A_, = U
. Define
, for C e (p
t X]
A^ = \J I^C"'^ C t To , or C t(p and dim ^ ^ k | . To thow that
- (A , ,,.. , Η ) is a handle presentation of^ , ^ ^
-1
π
we note: (0
=1 N^^^j ^ ^
is a regiolar neighbourhood
of X in M. (2) is any subset of φ then
(
, X) is a relative manifold. In fact, if (3) , containing X, , and
X) is a relative n-manifold.
denotes
U
^
197
These are easily provt-d. "'•he· only thl'iF
=
thao r-mains to be shown i? that
^ -i k-hsndie s. The Ir-h^ndlcs ovidrntl:/ have to be
(C'^ C"'^ η foC]"'), Tor J
snd dim C = k. There are. two
diffv^rent cases to consider, depending on whether C is in the interior or boundary of "'TTt .
how, C"^^ is an n-cell, since
C^M-X and
(M,X) is a relative n-manifold. There is a canonical isomorphism LkCr^C, which for
D
d(Lk(^C, d(p)),
takes
to
D"^-! St(rjD, d(Lk(^C, d(p )))\. This shows that
G}"
corresponds to
V(r^c, .(p)'"
"«i""·
A further fact is; Lk(^ C, d(P ; = d [d
AC.
Now if C is an interior k-cell, |aC| is an (n-k-1 )-sphere; and so, composing all these facts together, we get a polyhedral equivalence
f ;
--- 1ac| which takes C'^ Γ\
regular neighbourhood of OC,
c]" onto a
This dire ctly shows that
(c^C^ α
c]*)
is a k-handle. If C is a boundary k-cell, then \ Acl is an (n-k-1 )-cell. Let
F be a cone on \
5 we then use the standard trick which makes
C^®· , which vias the con^ on iLkCv-jC, d^(p ) \, which is equivalent to b e ^ lAcl, equivalent to C ><,F:
1
.κ in which th^· set C"" Γ\,
Cf", which was maoped to
^
corresoonds to Π [hcYi
- ( 0 Gj Κ Γ.
This shows, from our second way of looking at handles, that (C'", C'^'O
cj^') is a k-handle. We aight remark that in case (i), C (^^(C^^) is an attaching
sphere, but that in case (ii), this lies in the boundary,^ of thp attaching tube; that is why case (ii) is somewhat more complicated than case (ΐ).Π S.3· Statement of the theorems, applications, comments. Here we state the main theorems of handle-theory and apply them to situations such as s-cobordism and unknotting. We outline the proofs, so that the rest of our work is devoted to the techniques which make this outline valid.
'We say a few words about gaps (such as a
thorough discussion of V/liitehe-sd torsion) for which there are adequate references. Our theorems and proofs are quite similar to those wellknown for differential manifolds; of course, there is no worry about roiondin^; off corners: there is no need to use isooooy-extension theorems, since cell^olar moves suffice.
Finally, bhe crucial point is for homotopy
to imply isotopy in certain unstable dimensions; the result needed here has been described by V/eber, j_ see C. Weber, L' elimination des points doubles dans le cas combinatoire, Comiri. Math. Helv. , V0I./4I, Fasc 3, 19ό6-67_7: for variety and interest, we provr: the necessary result in a quite different v/ay
199
8.3.1.
Definition. Λ relative n-raanifold (Μ,Χ) is seld to be
gjeometrically trivial, if Μ
X.
If (M,X) is a special case, where X is an (n-l)-submanifold of 0 Μ, Μ an n-manifold, then freometric triviality means just that Μ ίί! X X I with X corresponding to X Ά 0. When k Q B
are finite CW-complexes, with A
Β a horao-
topy equivalence, the torsion of (B,A), denoted by T(B,A), is a certain element of the Vihitehead group of ίΓ^(Β). 8.3-2. Definition. Suppose (M,X) is a special case. That (M,X) is algebraically trivial means: (1) XC^ Μ is a homotopy equivalence. (2) T(M,X) = 0 (3)
^(MjX)C^ M induces an isomorphism on
.
(_ Remark: Using a form of Lefschetz duality in the universal covering spaces, it is provable that (3) is implied by (1) plus the weaker condition that "Jj (M,X)C^ Μ induces an injection on
J.
If (M,X) is not a special case, let Ν be a regular neighbourhood of X in M. Define M^ = Μ - Ν, and X^ ^ bdj^ N. Then (M^ , X^) is a special case, uniquely determined, upto polyhedral equivalence, by (M,X). We call (M,X) algebraically trivial whenever (M^ »
) i® algebraically trivial. Vi/"hen we know of (M,X) that only conditions (l) and (3) are
satisfied, (M,X) being special, we call (M,X) an h-cobordism, and ^(M,X) the torsion of of this h-cobordism. Clearly, if (M,X) is geometrically trivial, it is also
200
algebraically trivial, Th'- converse, vp. shall shovi, is true for relative n-manifolds, n^o . Lft (M,X) be a relative n-manifold v;hich is a special casf. Here are th;^ main r^: suits. Theorem A. If (M,X) is l-conn' ct-'d, and ί. ί η-Λ, then (Μ,Χ) has a handle presentation with no handles of indices ^ 1 . If farthermore,
(M,X) has a handle presentation v,ath handles of indices ^ p
only, then it has a handle presentation v.ith haridles of indices and ^ Kax( t +
1
only. Ο
Theorem 3. If (;1,X) has a handle presentation with handles of indices ^ n-3 only, and η ^ 6, and if
is a homotopy equivalence
with Τ'(Μ,Χ) = 0, then it has a prf^se.ntation vdthout any hindlrs; so that Μ
X.
D
Theorem C. If (M,X) is alfebraically trivial and η peometrically trivial.
ό , then it is
•
Theorem C holds for the i^en» ral relative n-manifold, and this follows from Th^i'orem G in the special ens. by referring to the special case
(M^, X^) described earlier. Theorem A and 3 imply Thcort.m C by duality, which is
described in 8.8. W start with a handle presentation by Theorem
' we can chancre the dual presentation ^^
of (M,X); into one with
no handles of index ^ n-A; dualising this, we get a handlf presentation of (^'',Χ) v.lthout handles of indices ^ h; since η >,5, Theorem 3 aoplies to 8. 3· 3. 'rte now? list the techniques used in proving Theorems A and B.
201
(Ο
Gancellirit^ pair? of handli-^s. In ), Eomrtimes
reason why a (k-l)-h"ndl· 'f'l and
handle presentation
is a vf:ry explicit geometrical K-h-^ndl-
nullify fvach other,
εο that thi^y can b. dropped from th? hnndlo pr-.rentation. If \T is the transv-rse tubf- of
, and Τ
the attaching; tube o^ 'fi , and
t\I - Ν Γ\Τ '-nd Τ - NOT
ar-?- both
(n-O-cells, this is the c^se. This
alone suffices to prove Tnr-orem A wh'· a 't = 0. V«V: discuss this in S. 5. (2) Modifi-ing the handle presentation. We want to shrink do\'jn transverse and attaching tubes until they become manareable, and to isotop thinrs around. This can b'- done kdthout damaging the essential structure, which consists of (a)
The polyh'^dral equivalence cl^^ss of
(M,X), (b) The number of handles of each irjex, (c) The salient features of the algebraic structure, namely, th( maps
ΓΓ (·'''• ,)~>IT' k k k-1
g.nd bases of these groups. This is ionr in
)
k-1 k-1 k-2
·~.'-ί.
(3) Inserting; cancelling p-^irs of handles, the opposite to ( 1 ) is sometim'^'s necessary in order to simplify th·· algebrai c structure; this occurs in δ. 6. This, togctaer ivith (l) and (2), alloviS us to prove Theorem A for J?, = 1 , -t the -χρ^η?' of "xtra 3-handles, Once we have done this, there are no more Knotty rroup-theoretic difficulties, and the universal covering soaces of the Λ. s are all emb-dded in 1
each other. Then vre can take a closer look at: {U) The algebraic structure. This consists of the bound^.ry m'-^ps ΓΓ (A ,Α j Γ Γ ,A ). k k k-1 k-Γ k-Γ k-1
Whp-n there ar·^ no 1-handles,
these groups are free modules over the fundamental-croup-ring, with bas^s determined, upto mulLiplyine by ± FT, by the handles. We can
202
change bases in certain prescribed ways by inserting and csncelling pairs of hcndles.
This allows us to set up a situation vrhere a
(k-O-handle and a k-handle algebraically cancel. We discuss this in 8,9.
'-^d now, both Theorems
and 3 follow if we can get algebraically
cancelling handles to cancel in the real ^eoinetric sense. This amounts to getting an isotopy out of a homotopy of attaching spheres; this is, of course, the whole point; all the oth'^r techniques are a simple translation to handle piOsentations of the theory of simple homotopy types of J.H. C. Vi/hitehead. (5) The isotopy lemma. This is the point where all dimensional restrictions really maiiP themselves felt. The delicate case, which applies to (n-3)- and (n-i!i)-handles, just barely squeaks by. 8.3·4. Thr s-cobordism thforem. By an s-cobordism is meant a triple (M;A,B), where Μ is an n-manifold:
and Ε are disjoint
(n-1 )-6ubmanifolds of ^ M; jj i^i - Ay Β is polyhedrally eauivalent to ^ A
I in such a way that δ A corresponds to
course, ^ B and
to ^A
l);
A
Μ
A X 0 (and, of
and Β C^ Μ are homotopy equivalences;
'Τ(Μ,Α) - 0. A trivial cobordism is
triple
(M;A,B) equivalent to
(A X I; A V. 0, A X 1). Theorem.
If (M;n,B) is an s-cobord'.sm, and dim Μ ^ 6, then
(M;A,B) is a trivial cobordism. Proof! This follows from theorem C. The rair (M,A) is a relative manifold, sp^cicU. cas·-.; and -iill the hyiDotheses of Theorem C are clearly valid; in particular, Π (Β) Γί I II M-A) ~ Π" (M) , since Β ς Μ
is a
203
homotopy· equivalence. Hence, by thporem C, (Μ,^'Ι·) is equivalent to (Αχ I, A XO).
Me know, by assumption, ta^t ^ Μ - A \J Β is a
regular neighbourhood of
^ ·'>· in ^ Μ - a; anl clearly c) A )C I is a
regular neighbourhood of ^ A X 0 in
5 C^»· X I) -
X
Thus we can
fix up the eqioivalence of (Μ,η) to (Αχ I, A X 0) to take 3 M-^ \J Β onto ^ A X I; this leaves Β to map onto A
i, which shows the
cobordism is trivial. D "We remark that if VC^ik) is trivial, then T(M,A) = 0 automatically. It is with this hypothesis that Smale originally proved his theorem; various people (Mazur and Bardon) noticed that the hypothesis needed in th-^ non-simply-connected case, was just that A Q Μ he a simple homotopy equivalence (vfhence the "ε"); i.e. ^(M,A) = 0. 8.3.5. Zeeman's unknotting theorem. We have already described the notion of an unknotted sphere. Theorem. If A(3. B, where A is a k-sphere, Β an n-sphere, and k ^ n-3, then A is unknotted in 3. Proof; By induction on n. For η < 5, th^^ c'.ses are all quite trivial, except for k = 2, η ρ 5, which has been treated earlier.
For η ^ β
•'ffz will show that tlie pair (B, A) is equivalent to the suspension of (B , A ) where Β
is an (n-1)-sphere and A
a (k—1)—sphere; and
clearly the suspension of an unknotted pair of spheres is unknotted. To desuspend, for η ^ 6, v;e proceed thus: If χζΑ,
then th- link of χ in (3,A) is a pair of
spheres which is unknotted, by the inductive hypothesis. That is to say, A is locally unknott- d in B. In particular, we can find an n-cell
204
Ε (2 Β, such that S Γ\ Λ is a k-cell unknotted in E; and so that E, ^(ΕΠΑ)) is bicollared in (B,A); ir fact, this coald have been done whether or not A were locally unknotted. Define
F = Β - E. B\/ earlier results ^ is an n--cell.
f Consider the relative manifold
(F, ΡΓ\Α).
It
easily seen that
this pair is algebraically trivial; be caure of codiiTiensiori \ 3 all fundamental groups are trivial, and so Wliitehead torsio.i is no problem; the homology situation is an easy exercize in Alexander duality. Hence, by Theorem. C, F collapses tc
FT\ A ^ 3jnco
FP. Λ·
is a k-cellj it collapses to a point; putting these together, (F, FnA; collapses to
(pt, pt) in the category of pairs; these co^lapf-es are
homogeneous in the pair (BjA) because of local unkncttednefs. We started vdth
(F, FT,A) bicollared, and hence, by the regular neigh-
bourhood theorem, suitably stated for pairs, (Γ, F
is a regular
neighbourhood of χ t A in (θ,A), whicn is an unknotted cell pair (again using local unknottedness). Thus (B,A) is the unioa of two un:-Qiot,ted cell oaxrs (E, ΕΠΑ)
and
(Γ, ϊΤ\Α), which sno-./s it
a pcxyhfdrally equivalent
to the suspension of ( b F, c^ (Σ Π A;). Ζ. Remark
1. This is just Zeeman's proof, except that we use our
Theorem C where Zeeman uses the cunberson·.'^ technique of "sunny collapsing". Remark
2. Lickorish has a theorem for desuspending general suspen--
sions embedded in S
in ccdinension
3· It is possible, by a
similar argument, to reolace "sunny collapsing" b:/" Theorem
T'^e
205
case π = 5 can be treated by a very simple case of sunny collapsing. Remark
3. If ΑζΒ,
where
A is an (n-2)-sphere locally unknotted
in the n-sphere 3, and η ^ D, and 3 - λ has the homotopy type of a 1-sphere, then η is lonknotted in B. Proof exactly as in the cociimension 3 case : we need to know that V/hitehead torsion is OK, v.'hich it is since the fundamental group of the 1-sphere is infinite cyclic; and this proup has zero \\"hitehead torsion, by a result of Graham Higman (units of group-rines). Remark
h. It has been a folk result for quite a while that the
•^nknottinK Theorem followed from the prooer statement of the h-cobordism theorem. 8.3-6. 'rtMtchead torsion.
For any group {"C' , there is defined a
commutative group Vi/h( ΓΤ). Elements of V/h( \T ) fi^e represented by square, invertible matrixes over the intrtrcr group ring Ζ ΓΓ . Two matrices
η and Β represent the same element in VJh( iT ), if and
only if there are identity matrices I,^ and Ij^ , and a product Ε of elementary matrices, so that
Ij^ ^ Έ. (B^i^J. Here
denotes the kxk
identity matrix.
Λη elementary matrix is one of the follov.rini: (a) I + e. ., where e. . is the nxn whose entries bv zero except for the ij — , (b)
k), which is tht· nxn
which is
1; and i / j.
matrix ecual to the
identity matrix, except that the kk'^'' entry is ^ to be an element of 1 ΓΓ ·
matrix all of
; we restrict oC
206
3y clevfrly composing matrices of this sort, we can obtain ^n
^^^ Λ ^ Ζ ΓΓ , for instance. Addition in Wh( V\" ) is induced from
, or, eauivalently,
from matrix multiplication. The geometric significance of Wh( !T ) is that a homotopy equivalenc-. f : Κ — L
between finite
element of Wh(rV ), ίΥ= Π'^(Κ), torsion is zero, wonderful things
GW-complrxes determines an
called the torsion of
f. If the.
(e.g. 3-cobordisra) happen.
If ΓΓ is the trivial group, then Wh( Γ\ ) = 0, basically because
Ζ ΓΓ is then a Euclidean domain. If (T is infinite cyclic, then Wh( iT) = 0, by Higman.
His algebraic argument is easily understood; it is, in some mystical sense, the analogue of breakinr something the homotopy tvpe of a circle into two contractible pieces on which we us^- the result for the trivial group. If (T has order 5, then V/h( iT )
0.
In fact, recent
computations show Wh( fT) to oe infinit·": cyclic. Various facts about V/h can be found in Milnor's paper. /'^Whitehe ad Torsion" Bulletin of A. M.S , Vol.72, No.3,
1966_7. In
particular, the torsion of an h-cobordism can be computed (in a straight-forward, may be obvious, vay) from any handle presentation. There is another remark about matrices that is useful. Let A be an nxk
matrix over Ζ ΓΓ^ such that any k-rov.t-vector /"i.e.
1 A k matrix_7 is some left linear combination, with coefficients in Ζ (Τ, of the rows of A; in other words, Λ corresponds to a
207
sur.lection of a free Ζ (Γ-module with η basis elements onto one vri.th k basis elements. Let
denote thf k A k zero matrix.
Then there is a product of elementary so that E. ( ^ ^ = /'^k \ V^kJ ^"nxk/
(n+k)>>(n+k) matrices, E,
This is an easy exercise.
8.3.7. In homotopy theory we shall use such devices as univeral covering spaces, the relative Hurewicz th?or<^m, and some homology computations (with infinite cyclic coefficient group). For example, if (H,T) is a k-handle, then H^ (H,T) = 0 \
for i / h
(H,T) = Z, an infinite cyclic group,
We always arrange to have the fundamental group to act on the left on the homology of the universal covering space. Suppose that (M,X) is a relative n-manifold, special case, and (N,X) = (M,X) + ^
+...+/, where the /'s '
are handles of
?
index k. Suppose X, M, Ν are connected, and that ΓΓ^(M)—>ΓΓ (N) is an isomorphism; this implies that wp can imagine not only that MCN, '-'Λ* « but that M C where"/*»/ denotes universal covering space. Call rr^(M). Then the homology groups
are left Ζ ΓΓ-modules.
More explicitly, H.(Tl,K) if i / k; and Η (N,M) is a free Ζ [T-modulp with basis ^ ^^^ ,·•', 1 · Whatκdoes 1 mean? We take any lifting of (H,T) to -- handl-- (Η',Τ') in N; J I
we pick cither generator of
1
,T ), and map into Η^^(Ν,Μ) by
inclusion; the ri=sult is
The ambieuity in defining J
is
208
simply st^tpd: If we mike mother choice, then instead of
^
we
λ > wh'^^'^ X e - ΓΓ · When k
2, we c m go further and say that, by the relative
Hurcwicz theorem, |\ (N,M) ^ii h (N,j'i) ~ ΓΓ (Μ,Μ). κ k k
And tnus we hive a
fairly well-defined basis of ΙΤ^^(Ν,Μ) as a Ζ ΓΓ -mod'ole, dependent on the handles
..... i . Ρ This shows, by thr way, that (Ν,'ΐ) is (k-1 )-connected. We mieht have expected this, sinc£, homotopic-illy, Μ is obtained from Μ by attaching k-cells. Anothfr thing is a version of lefschetz duality as follows; If Μ is an ori^^nted manifold, .and X then
Μ v^lth X a polyhedron,
δ M-X) . Since universal covering spaces can all
be oriented, this vrarks th-re.
In particular, if Χ
Μ is a homotopy
equiv.alence, then H-'CM, X) . 0 for ill i, and so H^(M, jj M-X) - 0 for all i. ^"hen
c) M-X is the univ- rsal covring spacf of
that is, when fT, (
M-X)
^ M-X,
ΓΓ, (Mj, then the relative Hurewicz theorem
will show that Β M-XC^ Μ is a homotoDy equiv'jLenc". 8.3.8·
Infinite polyhedra. .'m infinite polyhc dron Ρ is a locally
compact subset of some finite-dimf^'nsicn-ir. real vector space, such that for every xfeP, therr. is an ordinary polyh'^dron Q, C P, such that χ is conti=ined in th^- topoloiTicil int'--rior of Q in P.
polyhedral
map f : Ρ — ^ Pp, bi^'tw:'-n infinite poly^^-'dr^i 5.s ·> function, such that for every ordin^^ry pol/hear^n
Q
T^ (f | Q) is an
ordinary polyhedron. Th^ category of infinite polyhf-~dri includes ordinary
209
polyhedra; and in addition, every open subset of an infinite polyhedron is an infinite polyhedron. The link of a point in an infinite polyhedron is easily defined; it turns out to be. a polyhedr.al equivalence class of ordinary polyhedra. Hence the notions of manifold and boundary in this setting are easily defined. If Μ is an infinite n-raanifold, then any coniOact subset Χζ,Μ is contained in the topological interior of some ordinary n-m.anifold
M. As for isotopies, we restrict ourselves to isotopies which
are the identity outside some compact set; such are the isotopies obtained from finitely many cellular moves. Any such isotopy on the bomdary of Μ
can be·, extended to an isotopy of this sort on M.
We can talk of regular neighbourhoods of ordinary (= compact) subpolyhedra in an infinite polyhedron, and th- same theorems (including isotopy, in this sense) hold. These concepts are useful here because if (M,X) is a relative n-manifold, then ^(M,X) is r,n infinite n-manifold. And now, any isotopy of ^(M,X) extends to an isotopy of M, leaving a neighbourhood of X fixed. In other words, this is convenient language for dealing with relative manifolds. This is the only' situation where we shall speak of infinite polyhedra; it is, of course, obvious that infinite polyhedra can be of use in many other cases which are not discussed in these notes (in particular, in topological applications of the "Engulfing Theorem").
210
Modification of handle presentqtions. If
=
n^) and ^t^ =
B^^) are
handle presentations of the relative n-manifolds
(M,X) and
respectively, an isomorphism betv/een ^ ^ ^nd equivalence h 5 Μ - · > Ν taking X
·
(M^X^)
is a polyhedral
onto X'
?nd
A^ onto B^ for
all i. Such an isomorphism eives a 1-1 function between handles and preserves various other structuresi Let ^
-
)·•··, A^) be a handle presentation of the
relative n-manifold
(M,X) and let
f :A
A
equivalence taking presentation
X onto itself.
Then by
be a polyhedral κ
Κ
^ is meant the handle
}···, B^) of (M,X), where B^ = f(A^) for i < k
B^ =
for i > k.
It is clear that
^ is a handle presentation of (M,X),
the handles of index > k are equal to those of "^l^^while a handle of of .index ^ k will correspond via
f to a handle of ^v.^·
There is another way upto isomorphism of looking at ^ ^ Suppose
f :A
^ A
Κ
a
is as before.
(k+1 )-handle of the presentation
by the inclusion of Τ in attaching all an equivalence'
Let
(H, Τ) be
^
. ^^ttacb
^
but by
(H,T) to
f|T, In this way
(k + 1 )-han'il.es we get a relative manifold extending
to Bj^^^ one for each
not
Similarly attach the
(B , X) and kI (k+2)-handles
(k+2)-handle of
restricted; and so on. In this way we get a relative manifold
(B^, X)
21 1
and a handle presentation
(A , ,. . .., ^i·, , Β ' κ κ 1
,.. , , Β ) of (Β ,Χ). η ^^
-ρ
This will be denotid by ^ ^ . f (B^, X) and an. isomorphism of
givf^s an equivalence of (M,X) vdtb Λf vd.th ^ ^ .
Thp main use in this chapter of the above modifications is for simplifjdng handle presentations, that is to obtain presentations vd-th as few handles as possible, or vathout any handles or vdthout handles upto certain index usin.T thefi;ivenalgebr aic data about It should be noted that (l) f
^ n^ei not be isomorphic to ^ ^ and
(2)
is not a handle orfsent^tion of (M,X). (2) is not a serious ^ 1 drawback, since isomorphic vi.i f~ and so whatever simplification one· can do foi·
can be done also
which
is a handle presentation of (Κ,Χ) or we Cc'^n fii^st '""o the sinplificationi f -1 and pull the new handle presentation to one of (M,X) by f^ . We will adopt tlie 'irocedure which is convenient in the particular case. If f : k^·
^ A^ is isotopic to thp identity leaving X fixed,
(and this ivill be usually th^ case), th-=n QV and
^ 'rfilj have many
homotopy properties in common; but more of this later. The most frequently used vfays of modifications are catalo^ueii below: 8.4. 1. Let (H,T) be a k-handle of the present aticn ^ = of (M,X). Then if ό . is a transvers'^ sphere and "i - ζ/Η-Τ the transverse tube, we have Ν a regular neighbourhood of ^ in If N' is any other r^^g^ular neighbourhood of 3 in ^ (Α^^,,Χ), there is an isotopy of ^ (A ,X) relating Ν and n' and this can b- extended
Κ
212
to Aj^, to give an end result
f^, with f,(N) = N'. Then ^
^
has its new handle (f^ H, f^ T) whose transverse tube is n'. D $>.k.2. Let (H^, T^) be a (k+1 )-handle of
, with an attaching
sphere^ . Then T^ is a regular neighbourhood of
dC-'^j-^)·
If T^' is any other regular neighbourhood of ^ in ^ i-'^,^) we can obtain a polyhedral equivalence
f^ of
which isotopic to 1
fixing X, such that fj (T^) ^ T^'. Then
2 (vMch is isomorphic
will have its (k+1 )-hanclf. corresponding to . (H , Τ ) 2 to have attaching tube
T^', and handles of index ^ k will be un-
changed. Q. Combining 8.4.1 and 8 4.2, vie have 8.4. β. Proposition. Let.^= of the relative n-manifold
Λ^) be a handle presentation
(M.X); let
be a k-handle and
(k+l)-handle with a transverse sphere of ^ sphere of ^
being ^
of 3 and ^
being S and an attaching
. Let Ν and Τ be regular neighbourhoods
in ^ (Λ^^,Χ). Then there is a handle presentation^^
of (M'j X') is equivalent to (M,X) with for some f ί I·^ t fixed; so that in,^^ '/ζ and
being isomorphic to
^ A^^ isotopic to the identity leaving X ρ^ // , the handles
and
corresponding to
are such that: the transverse tube of ^ the attaching tube of
Proofi
a
is N, ' is T, and
the k^*^ levl
/i^' of ^
k^h level
of^.
Using the equivalences f^
is equal to the
and f^ given by 8.4.1 and 8.4.2,
213
Qi^f^^ 2 is the required presentation. presentation ^ ^ ^ ^ - I f )
It is isonorphic to the
· Since both f^
and f^ are
isotopic to the identity lea\dng X fixed, ΐ^'^ property.
The last point is obvious, L1
8,k.U. L e t ^ = (H,T) be a (k + l)-handle of^^^ , and S an attaching sphere of ^
. S is in ^ (Α^^,Χ), Suppose that ε' is another
k-sphere in ,X) and that there is an equivalence taking; X onto'itself and such that f(S) = s\ handle-^ ^ correspondinp; to
f of A,
Then in ^
the
will have S^ as an attaching sphere.
If, for example, we can go from S to S^ by cellular moves, the we can obtain an equivalence f of Aj^ isotopic to and with f(S) = s\
1 leaving X fixed
This will also be used in cancellation of handles,
where it is more convenient to have certain spheres as attaching spheres
than the given ones. D 8. k. 5. Let ^ be a k-handle in a handle presentation = ' · · · ^^"n of a relative n-manifold. Then if k n-2, there is h isotopic to the identity, h ;/i^ of
^ 'V
corresponding to
^ fixed, such that the handle has a boundary core in
^
»/^-^here
(Keader, have faith that this ic useful.') We prove this by choosing attaching spheres for all the (k+1)-handles, finding a transverse sphere for ^
that intersects all
the attaching spheres only finitely, notin.e that t^ie transverse sphere, contains other points, and then shrinking the attaching tubes and the
214
transverse tube conveniently. More explicitly, Let
be the (k-1 )-handles of ^
attaching spheres S^
, vdth
S^. Let Ν be the transverse tube of^L ;
there is a polyhedral equivalence any x^ int D^,
f : Ν s: d'^
Δ
so that for
is a transverse sphere to^h. Now,
(S^U... \JSp)f\N is
k)-dimensional, and so, triangulating
projjjk * f so as to be simplicial and picking χ in the interior of a k-simplex of D (see 4.2.14), we have found a transverse sphere to finite. Now,
, such that ^
pS (S^vj ... US^) is
is an (n-k-1 )-sphere; and since k ^ n-2,
contains infinitely many points; there is y t Σ -
^p)·
Now then, if we teke very thin regular neighbourhoods of ^
, Sj
in ^(Aj^jX'^the regular neighbourhood of ^
will
intersect those of S^
S^ in only small cells near each point
of intersection of
···
Γ\(^i
hence there will be a cross-
section of the 21 -neighbourhood /"i.e., corresponding to D^aS,
,z
(X,2) = f(y)_7, through y, not meeting any of
the S^ neighbourhoods. transverse tube of
We make these regular neighbourhoods the
and the attaching tubes oi A
, by 1
changing ^
to [
where g^ and
Aj^—^Aj^ isotopic to the identity, fixing X. In
ρ
equivalences ^ '2
^e have
/ misses all a boundary core of the handle corresponding to i11 Vwhich the attaching tubes of the through y"). We define
(k+1)-handles (this is that "cross-section
h = g^"' g^ ; and since
is isomorphic
to {^^g^^ ^ , we have some boundary core of 'J^^ where
^^
is
215
the handle corresponding to ^
which does not intersect the attaching
tubes of all the (k+1 )-hsndles, and is therefore in
K)·
S. 5. Cancellation of handles. Convention; Let us make the convention that a submanifold of another manifold should mean this; If A
Β , A and Β are PL-manifolds, we call A a
submanifold of B, if and only if, An^ Β is (dim A - 1 )-subraanifold of ^A. We are usually in this section interested only in the case dim A = dim B. vJith this convention, if A is a submanifold of B, then Β - A
is a submanifold of B, and bd J k ) = bd „(B - A) = ό A - dB. ti D
If C C Β c A all PL-nanifolds such that each is a submanifold of the next, then A _ (B - C) = A - Β U C. We may therefore be justified somewhat in writing A _ Β for A - B. Thus, hereafter, Η is a submanifold of Β means that A is a submanifold of Β in the above sense, and in that case Β - A stands for Β - A. Let
= ^^ 1 )···')
be a handle presentation of a
relative n-manifold (M,X). Let "fu = (H, 3 h - N ) with transverse tube N, and
be a k-handle
fi = (Κ,Τ) be a (k+l)-handle with
attaching tube T. Mote that KU Τ C 0 (Aj^j-"^) with the above conventions we can write - fi^ = {{I^
) U K) U H.
216
a transverse sphere of
an attachi sphere of
A iis attached
to A^^ by Τ Ν
217
8.5.1. Definition, 1) ΝΛΤ
say that A
and
can be cancelled if
is a submanifold of both Ν and Τ
2) Ν - (NOT) and Τ - (νΛΤ) are both (n-l)-cells. . Suppose A Assertion 1. (,Α^
and
can be cancelled. Then
)Π Κ is an (n-l)-cell contained in ^(A^-^ ,X)
and in 0 Κ. In fact, {ky. -A )Γ\Κ = Τ - (ΝΠ Τ), which we assumed to be an (n-l)-cell. Assertion 2.
(_(A^^-/C ) U κ)Π Η is an (n-l)-cell contained in
^ ((A^-fi.)UK,/.')and in 0Η.
For
((Aj^-·^) ΟΚ)ηΗ - attaching tube of =
plus NPvT
Η - N) U (NOT)
= ό Η - (N - ΝΠΤ) and this is an (n-l)-cell, since
is an (n-l)-sphere and (N - ΝΠΤ)
is an (n-l)-cell in ό H.
.
•
'
*
Combining these two assertions with proposition 8.2,1, we have
,
.
8. 2. Proposition.
Supoose
,.·.,
is a handle'presen-
tation of a relative n-manifold (M,X); and there are a k-handle, and
^ = (H, d H-N)
= (Κ,Τ) a (k+l)-handle that can be cancelled.
Let IjL be any neighbourhood of Μ Π Τ in Aj^. Then there is a polyhedral equivalence f : (Aj^-^ , X)
(Aj^ ^ k , Σ)
which is identity outside 'LiU· . • This being so, we construct a new-handle presentation
«
218
(B_i
B^) of (M,X), vihich we denote b y ^ -
,'k ) as
follows: B^ = f (A^) for i< k
\
-f
-
^^
B^ = A^ for i>k. This of course depends on f somewhat· observe that, since the attaching tubes of the (k+1)-handles are disjoint, the attaching tubes of (k+1 )-handles other than ^ that
-
are in
h
X) - Τ ζ ^(A^
is a genuine handle-presentation.
8.5.3. (Description of
- (^ , ^ )).
The number of i-handles in
- {'K, L·) is the same as the number of i-handles of i ^
so
for
k, k+1. For i > k, each i-handle o f ^ i s a i-handle of -
A ) with the single exception of 'h ; and conversely. For
i 4 k, each i-handle of.^^ e x c e p t , say "C , corresponds to the i-handle ^
) of ^
-
and conversely each i-handle of
- (A,"^) .is of this form. If the attaching tube of
intersect some k-handle that
itself occurs in
, we can arrange f
does not
to be identity, so
~ (^J"^)· Q
The conditions for
and
to cancel are somewhat
stringent. We now proceed to obtain a sufficient condition on ^ and which will enable us to cancel the handles corresponding to
and ^
in some This requires some preliminaries. Suppose A, B, C are three PL-manifolds, AUBCC - C) C. dim A = p, dim Β = q and dim C = p+q, ^A ^ δβ = ^ . Let χfcAfVB.
,
219
8 5.4. Definition.
A and Β are said to intersect transversally at
X in C , if there is a neighbourhood hedral equivalence ^
f :F
F of χ in C and a poly-
S * 2Γ-ii- ν
v/here 3 is a (p-1 )-sphere,
a (q-1)-spherej such that 1) f(x) = V 2) f(A OF) - S * V 3) f(B fVF) = Σ:-"^ V
8.5.5. Proposition. Let S and ^ be
.
(p-l)- and (q-1)-spheres
respectively and Ε = S * X * ν . Let D = S * ν , Δ^Σ.^·· ^ · Suppose ^
is any simplicial presentation of Ε containing full sub-
presentations J^ and ^ and Q = |N 0
covering D and A . Let Ρ = ^
^
Π
. Then PHQ
is a submanifold both of Ρ and Q and
is contained in the interior of Ε (P, Q, and POQ
are all (p+q)-raanifolds)
2) Ρ - paQ Ν
Q - PHQ
Ρ A3E
^ Q Π DE.
Proof; First observe that, if the proposition is true for some centering: of ^ , then it is true for any centering of ζ
. Next, if
some other presentation of Ε such that D and ^
are covered by full
subpresentations, it is possible to choose centerings of ^ so that Ρ = Ρ and Q = Q . ' (P , Q and Q with reference to
, Novr wc choose
and
^
denoting the analogoues of Ρ
Thus it is enough to prove the
proposition for some suitable presentation centering of ^
is
'ζ
of Ε and a suitable
to be a join presentation of
220
Ε =S
^
ν
and choose the centering so that
(see 6.8.3 and
the remark thereafter) P' Q' = lst(v, d
= Ci (S ^^Σ ),
PLP'HQ' =
and
QLPVQ' -
il .
And in this case (l) and (2) are obvious. 8 5.6. Proposition.
Suppose
Q
A and Β are spheres of dimensions
ρ
and q respectively, contained in the interior of a (ρ+q)-manifold
C
and that A and Β intersect at a single point χ transversally
in C. Then there are regular neighbourhoods Ν and Τ of A and Β in C, such that 1) NOT
is a submanifold of both Ν
and Τ
2) Ν - (ΝΓ\Τ) and Τ - (ΝΓλΤ) are both (p+q)-cells. Proof; Let F be the nice neighbourhood of χ in C given by 8.5.4 i.e. there is a polyhedral equivalence where S is a (p-l)-sphere and
f:Fc;i
^ and
of 4
f is siiriDlicial vdth
WF can assume
presentations covering S * ν J
ν , Then (A - fJ
(B - F) is a (q-l)-cell. Let /f^ and
be triangulations of F and Ε such that reference to
ν
a (q-1)-sphere, such that
f(x} = v, f(AaF) ^ S •«• V , and f(BnF) = is a (p-O-cell and
Ε=3*ί.*
and 21 * ν
^ contains full sub. Now some refinement
can be extended to a neighbourhood of A (j B, denote it
by /f 5 it can be supposed that
contains full suboresentations
(J^ J G3 covering A, Β respectively.
Let "Π be a centering of
221
Denote by ζ by
the triangulation of Ε corresponding to
the centering of ^ corresponding to ^
and Τ =
by f, and
. Choose Ν
( (β )| ; and let P, Q be as in 9.5.5. If
P, = f"UP), Q, = f"^·':), then P^ - (Ρ,Π
) ^ Ρ,Π ()f and
Q^ - (P, HQ,) V Q, ^θΡ.
Clearly P^CN, Q,C Τ are submanifolds and
ΝΠΤ = P^nQ^.
is a submanifold of both Ν and T.
Thus imx
Ν - (Ν η Τ) = Ν - (Ρ,Λ Q^) = (Ν - Ρ,) υ (Ρ^- (Ρ,Π Q^))" collapses to (Ν - Ρ^) since Ρ^-(Ρ^Λ ς^) collapses Ρ, r^ <3 F C (Ν-Ρ^). But Ν - Ρ^ is a regular neighbourhood of A - F in C - F which is a (i>-l)-cell. Thus Ν - (NOT) \ N - P^ V Thus Ν - (MfVT) is a collapsible
- F which is collapsible.
(p+q)-manifold, hence a (p+q)-cell.
Similarly Τ-(ΝΓ\Τ) is a (p+q)-cell. • 8.5.6. Definition. Let ^^ =
,···,
of a relative n-manifold (M,X). Let (k+l)-handle of
be a k-handle and ^ be a
. We say that
there is a transverse sphere S of
tie a handle presentation
can be nearly cancelled if and an attaching sohere
which intersect a single point transversally in ^ 8 5.7»
Proposition.
n-manifold and
(M,X)
of ^
X).
Suppose^ is a handle presentation of relative a k-handle and il a (k+1 )-ha.ndle in ae.
ifi
can be nearly cancelled, then there is a polyhedral equivalence
f : jL^—^ A^ isotopic to th^^ identity leaving X fixed such that, in
^ the handles 'fi
and
corresponding to ^ and ^ can
be cancelled. Proof; Follows from 8.4.3 and 8.5.6.
Q
222
8.6. Insertion of cancelling pairs of handles. In this section we discuss the insertion of cancelling pairs of handles and two applications which are used in the following sections. First we form a standard trivial pair as follows:
Let D be a k-cell, I = (_0, l3 and Δ an (n-k-1 )-cell. Then Ε = 0 Χ Ι Χ Δ
is an n-cell. Let Δ
H. = D
Clearly
= (H,, T^) is a handle of index k. Next, let H2 =
= {(D X 0) υ (D)Ci) (J ( Clearly, A - (HJ, T2) is a handle of index (k+l). Finally, let F denote
(D )<. 0 X Δ ) (J ( Od
I κΔ).
(D X 0x Δ ) Λ( δ D
ΑΔ. )= δD XO
223
is an (n-2)-manifold, hence F is an (n-1)Tmanifold. Moreover F is collapsible, hence it is an (n-O-cell. Now, let^^ be a handle presentation of a relative n-manifold (M,X); we take an (n-l)-cell F' in 0
away from the k- and
(k+1)-handles. That is F' is in the common portion of X),
X) and d
X) and clearly it is possible to
choose such an F' if (k+l)
;F
the result by A^UE.
~
f' and attach Ε to k^ by ^ . Denote
Since Ε is an n-cell meeting
(n-l)-cell f', there is an equivalence
i" ' \
fixed. Then we get a new handles presentation
in an ^ leaving X
>.··> B^) of
(M,X) as follows: Bi = Bj^ = Bi = A^
, for ik.
Next we consider the problem of attaching a cancelling pair of k- and (k+1 )-handles ("^,.Α) to
A^^, with ^ having a prescribed
attaching sphere. We recall from Chapter VII (7.2) that a sphere in the interior of a PL-manifold Ν is unknotted (by definition) if it bounds a k-cell. In such a case it bounds an unknotted cell (again in the sense of 7.2). If S and S' are two unknotted k-spheres in the same component of Ν - ^ N, then there is an isotopy h^ of Ν leaving
Ν fixed such that h^(S) = S', Similarly if D and D'
are two \inknotted k-cells in the same component of Ν - 3Ν, there is an isotopy of Ν taking D onto D'.' Similar remakrs apply in the
224
case of relative manifolds also. Now consider just Aj^, let F' be any (n-O-cell in ^ (Aj^jX) and form A^^UE by an equivalence
F
3 = ^ 0 ye,
Δ . S is an
<. 1 and e ^ Δ
attaching sphere of ^ , and
^ =^
=-^(D X 0) 0(D A D U
•
is an attaching sphere of'k .
And { p A O 0 0D S = ^DXdLXe,
κ
P'. Consider
= C, say, is a k-cell bounding an attaching sphere of lb . Moreover
-
C-
D>C.
^ e
•= C - (a regular neighbourhood of S in C). Finally C is unknotted in F. The result of all this is, if A is a (k-l)-sphere bounding an mknotted
k-cell Β in
then we can attach a cancelling
225
pair of k- and (k+1 )-handles
,'K) such that A is an attaching
sphere of Tl and an attaching sphere of α
intersects
Β - (a given a regular neighbourhood of A in B). This can also be seen as follows: Let L be an (n-l)-cellj A a (k-l)-sphere in L bounding an unknotted k-cell Β in the interior of L. Let Μ be an n-cell containing L in its boundary. We may join A and Β to an interior point ν of
and take second derived neighbourhoods.
Let Η be a second derived neighbourhood of A ·»· ν and Κ be the closure of [second derived neighbourhood of Β * ν - Η
. Then
(Η, HAL) is a k-handle, ,and (Κ, (ΚΓιΗ) u(Kf>L)) is a (k+1 )-handle. The k-handle has A as an attaching sphere, and an attaching sphere of the (k+l)-handle intersects L in (B - a regular neighbourhood of A in B). Thus we have, 8.6. 1. Let
=
,"·', A^) be a handle presentation of a
relative n-manifold (M,X) and let 3 C which bounds an unknotted cell Τ in
be a (k-l)-sphere Then there are a
k-handle ^ and a (k+l)-handle ^ , such that (1) S is an attaching sphere of (2) There is an attaching sphere ^ ^ Π. \
of
very closed to T, th^.t is
with Ο A^
can be assumed to be (T- R prescribed regular neighbourhood of S in T). exists and is polyhedrallyequivalent to (Α^,Χ) by an equivalence which
226
is identity outside a given neighbourhood of Τ in If S is in 5
^
^
w
have its attaching tube in ^
e
can choose Κ
to
that there is an obvious
handle presentation of ((V +
Λ
, X). V»'e sive below two appli-
cations of this construction. 8.6.2. Trading handles. Let
».·-·>
be a handle
presentation of a relative n-manifold (M,X). Let p^ be the number of i-handles in ^
. i^ppose that there is a (k-l)-handle L
(2 < k ^ n-l) with a transverse sphere ^ , and that there is a (k-l)-sphere S in
X) Π h
such that (l) 3 is
unknotted in b (Α^,Χ), (2) S intersects ^ one point in ^ (A^^
transversally at exactly
X). Then there is a procedure by which we can
obtain another handle presentation
of (M,X), such that (a)
for i / k-1 or k+1, the number of i-handles in Qf^ is equal to the number of i-handles in^^^'j
the nurabfr of (k-1 )-handles in ^
is p^^ ^ J- 1 (c) the number of (k+1 )-handles in
is
This is done as follows: First consider only A^. -Applying 3.6,1, we can add to A^^ a cancelling pair of k- and
such that S
is an attaching sphere of 'Ki , and the attaching tube of S is in )
= B. Then th^ relative manifold
(B,X) has the obvious handle presentation where B^
for i 4 k-1
- (B ^ ,'··•,
227
In
J •the handles
Hence for some equivalence
f of
leaving X fixed, in ponding to 'C and ^ ^^
isotopic to identity and
the handles
^
p.nd
) corres-
can be cancelled. Let ^J-^ = ^ ^ -(
)·
is a handle presentation of (B,X); the number of i-handle in for i
ρ
and "fu can be nearly cancelled.
is p^, the number of (k-1 )-handles is ^ ^
,·^ 1J the number of k-handles is ρ
Also there is an equivalence dO '·
is
and there is one (k+1 )-handle.
— ^ Β which can be assumed to be
identity near X. Thus we can pull back ^Ks" to a handle presentation
"3
hy Now, we would like to add the k+l)-handles of ^
to
to get a new handle presentation of (M,.X).. But it may happen that the attaching tubes of the (k+1)-handles of ^ transverse tube of
intersect the
) which is in
However, we can
adopt the procedure of 8.U.5, to get the'desined type of handle presentations as follows: of
Letl?^''^'^ with attaching tubes Τ , Τ
,
Τ
be the (K., )-handles respectively- (k+1)
Choose some ^ttnching soheres S and then a transverse sphere S,
S of these handles, P(k+1)_ of ^
(ft) avoiding
S . This is done in the same way as in 8.4.5, using P(k+1)
228
the product structure of the transverse tube of cC D^'^V
) as
and noticing that the S^ are now -k-dimensional.
Then choose a regular neighbourhood
of ^ ^ which does not inter-
I
sect the S^ s and do a modification of type 8.^.1
so that, for some
g) in
) has N^ as
β
the handle
' corresponding
V
its transverse tube. Now choose regular neighbourhoods T^' of S^ in
ό
such that T ^ ' =
for all i, j, i
0
for all i and T^' π T^' - 0
j. There is an equivalence
to the identity leaving X fixed such that Now attach the handles but by
of \
isotopic
(T^) = T^' for all i.
to Aj^ not by the inclusion of T^
T^. Then we obtain a relative n-manifold say (C,X) and .
a genuine handle presentation eq\iivalence
say
^ of (C,X). Moreover the
of A^^ can be extended to an equivalence ^
k^^^ with C. Now pull back
of
to A^^^ by (i^i^+i)"^· In the
handle presentation
( fb ) C X ) of there are handles k+1 1 K+i only upto index (k+l); so that the handle of index ^ k+2 of can be added as they are to get a handle presentation of (M,X) of the derived type.
Q
8.6.3. The second application is concerning the maps in the homotopy groups:
(A^^,
^^ will be seen later
that \ander suitable assumptions, these are free Z.IT -modules with more or less well defined bases. The problem is to find handle presentations for which the matrices of bj^'s with reference to preferred bases will
229
be in some convenient form (8.9. ). Here we describe an application of S.6.1 which is useful for this purpose. Let Ν be a PL n-manifild> and assume that Let
ρ
k-handles (2 ^ k 4 n-2) so that η
is connected. k) attached
to N. If we choose a cell in b Ν intersecting the handles as "base point", any attaching sphere of ^^ ( element in by ^
( 0Ν).
determines a well defined
Let the elements in ΓΓ^ ^(Sn) determined
and ^ be eC. '"-nd . Let Q be, an element of 1 ^ I ^ Imagine that the handles are in the form^ ^ = όΠ^χΑ^),
Dj^ a k-cell,
an (n-k)-cell i = 1,2. Let p.
we have surface cores C^ = D^ ^ Pi of S^ = c) Djj^)!. p^ of X a point of S2 in ^N
and representatives
Let Ρ be a path between a point of S^ and representing 0. Since η
we can
assume that Ρ is an embedded arc, and since k ^ n-2, that it meets each S^ at exactly one point. Now ; Ρ appears also as an arc joining C^ and C2. Thicken P, so that we have an (n-l)-cell Q which intersects C^
,and C2 in (k-1 )-dimensional arcs E^
with E^ = ^ C^^n^Q.
and E2
We can be careful enough to arrange for E^
to be unknotted in h Q, so that there is a k-cell F C Q with ^ F n d Q = E^ U ^2· The composite object C^ U F U C2 is now a k-cell with boundary (S^ - E^) VJ^^F - (E^UE2)^ \J {S^ - E^), which represents in (T, (^N) the element k-1
^ , + β «C - The sign depends on F, 1 - 2 •
and we can choose F so as to have the prescribed sign (see Chapter VII). Mrreover we can assume that
is unknotted in
+
230
Stretch C^^JFUC2 a little to another unknotted k-cell Τ so that S =
C (
- union of the attaching tubes of
^ and
That is, we have a (k-l)-sphere S in ^ Ν representing 1 + ^ ®
^^ =
Τ in ^ (N -h
prescribed) and bounding an unknotted cell
^+
and S is away from ^ ^ and fv^, Vfe now
add a cancelling pair of k- and an attaching sphere of sects
(k+1)-handles
and ^
, so that
is S and an attaching sphere of ^ inter-
^((N + li 1 " f^ 2} Now,
Ν
- if ii/(N +1 2 + ^ )
1 2 ^
But then ^ ^ and ^ nearly cancel, since attaching sphere of intersects a transverse sphere of ^ ^ exactly as C^ does, that is, at one point, transversally. (k+l)-handle
such that
So that, after an isotopy we can find a ^ and
actually cancel. Thus
-
(N .
^
We have proved^ 5.6.4. Proposition. Let Ν be a PL n-manifold, with connected boundary ^ N;
Let
and
^
handles attached to N,
and cC , eC „ be the elements in (T (d N) given by Ά and ^ : 1 2 k-1 " 1 2 and θ he an element of fi 1
N). Then there exists a handle ^ which •it.s χιΊ-.+.ΛΛΗ-ί ησ +.iihp awair fTOm can be attached to N, with its attaching tube away from and "ίΐ 1
^
Λ . Λ • -2
repressented by
Ν + ^ +
is tC^ + Q
, and the element of Γ (d N) 2 k-l prescribed. D
2
231
Remark 1; Some details; such as thickening of P, choosing certains cells so as to be unknotted; are left out. These are easy to verify using our definition of unknotted cells and choosing regular neighbourhoods in the appropriate manifolds.
There is another point to check:
that the homotopy groups can be defined vdth cells as 'base points', so that vie can get avray vdthout spoiling the embeddings
(of attaching
spheres in appropriate dimensions), when forming sums in the homotopy groups or the action of an element of the fundsunental group. Remark 2; In 8.6.4, instead of the whole of ^ N, we may as well take a connected
N' in ^ N and do every thing in its
(n-1)-manifold
interior; of course, now eC ^, jC. 2 6
) and
^^(N').
Remark 3! The proof can also be completed by observing that S and S^ differ by cellular moves in
(N +
8.7. Elimination of 0 - and 1-handles. The first thing to do is to remove all handles of index 0, and
1 to attain a stage where (T ^ (Aj^) ΓΓ^ (M). At this point we
csLn interpret
\ 1)
homology groups in universal
covering spaces and this helps things along. 8.7.1. Proposition. Let X/
,a n d a
(M,X) be a relative manifold, Μ connected,
handle presentation of (M,X). Then all the
0-handles of ^^ can be eliminated by cancelling pairs of 0- and 1-handles of
to obtain a handle presentation of (M,X) free of
0-handles. Proof: A 0-handle ^ = (H, ) and a 1-handle Ά = (Κ,Τ) cancel
232
if and only if the attaching sphere ^
of
intersects ^
single point; for the attaching tube Τ of joint
in'a
consists of two dis-
(n-l)-cells, and the transverse tube of ^ is ^ H, and so
what we need is for exactly one of the ό H. So all the 0-handles of since Σ ^
(n-l)-cells of Τ to be in
which are connected to
(/ 0,
by means of 0- and 1-handles can be eliminated. But
every 0-handle must be one such; for if 'C is a CV-handle of ^ ^ which is not connected to
by 0- and l-hsindles, then ^ together
with all the 0- and 1-handles connected to it will form a conponent of A^ which is totally disjoint from
Thus A^
two components,. and so, since CT^iA^)—>
has at least
is an isomorphism,
we have a contradiction to the assumption that Μ is connected. D For the neact stage, we need a lemma: 8.7.2. Lemma. A null homotopic
1-sphere in the interior of a
PL-manifold
Μ of dimension ^ k is unknotted.
Proof: Let
S be a null homotopic
We have to show that and X
1-sphere in the interior of M.
S bounds a 2-cell in ^L
Let
D .be a 2-cell,
an equivalence of δ D • with· 3. Since S is null homotopic
Ji extends to D, Approximate «C t)y a map
in general position
such that JS j d D = (L (0 D, and (i (D) C int M. The singular set S2 ( p ) of Ρ
consists of finite number of points and
are all empty. So we can partition ^P,
, P^^ ,
β» ) etc.
p ) into two sets
Qjj^^ such that β (p^) = Ρ (q^), 1 $
and there are no other identifications.
m
Choose some point ρ on ό D
and join^p, p^ ,..., ρ I by an embedded arc V'which does not meet any L ' ®5
233
of the q^'s. Let Ν be a regular neighbourhood of / i n
D, which
does not contain any of the q^'s. Ν is a 2-cell, Let Ν A D = 'bN η ^D = L, ^ Ν - L = K, and D - Ν = d'. Since L is a 1-cell, Κ is also And P | N as vrell as
1-cell, and D' is a 2--cell.
D' are embeddings.
So
( d D') is un-
knotted in M. But by 7.1.6, there is an isotopy carrying Ρ (Κ) and leaving S
onto
^(L) to
J5(C)d'- K) fixed, that is, the isotopy carries
|3(δθ'). Hence S is also unknotted. D
Remarks;
(l) The same proof works in the case of a niill homotopic
n-sphere in the interior of a
^ (2n + 2)-dimensional manifold.
(2) The corresponding lemma is true in the case of relative manifolds also. (3) If S is in
^ M, then the result is not known.
It is conjectured"· by Zeeman, that the lemma in this case is in general false (e.g. in the case of contractible 4 dimensional manifolds of Mazur). 8.7.3. Proposition. Let
A^) be a handle presentation
without 0-handles of relative n-manifold
(M,X) and let ΓΓ^(Μ,Α
« 0.
Then by admissible changes involving the insertion of 2- and 3-handles and the cancelling of
1- and 2-handles, we can obtain from ^
presentation of (M,X) without Proof; Let
a handle
0- or 1-handles, provided
be a 1-handle of ^
. By 8.4.5, we can assume that
there is a surface core of 71 in ^(AG,
Because
X).
= 0, then
homotopy exact sequence of the triple
(M, A^, A
^ ° and so. C is
homotopic leaving its end points fixed to a path in is a horaotopy equivalence
(we are confining ourselves to the special
case after 8.3). So we get a map, where D is a 2-cell f : D — L · ^ - int with ^D :)C, such that
f(0 D - C)C
f | C - Id^.
Now in the (> 4 ) - m a n i f o l d r e m o v a l tubes of the
of the attaching
1-handles does not disturb any homotopy of dimension^2, so
that, we can arrange for . f(ilD - C) C
- (attaching tubes of 1-handles)
C
,X)
Likewise in ^(Α^,Χ),
(since
- A^).
the removal of the attaching tubes of
2-handles can be ignored as far as one-dimensional things go, so that we can assume f(5D - C ) C ^ (Α^,Χ), and that
f jdO
intersect ^
is an embedding.
Also, we can arrange
f(^ D) to
precisely along C.
Finally, then we have f JD
^ A^
with f(0D)c 'd (Α^,Χ) η ύ(Α^,Χ) fjc = Idp , and this is the only place vrtiere f(^D) intersects^ . Hence f( δ D) intersects a transverse sphere of ^
at exactly one point transversally. Now, upto homotopy,
attaching cells of dimensions
k^ is obtained from 0(Α2,Χ) by (n-2) and (n-l) /~cf. duality 8.8j7.
235
Since
(n-2)^3, ^
deformed into f
^
"
J (A2,X) leaving f|6D
is null homotopic in
^^us the map
f can be
fixed. Thus the 1-sphere hence by Lemma 8.7.2 it is
unknotted in d (/i2,X). Now we can apply 8.6.3 to trade ff
for a
3-handle. We can apply this procedure successively until all' the 1-handles are eliminated.
Since in this procedure, only the number of
1-handles and 3-handles is changed, in the final handle presentation of (M,X) there will be no 0-handles either. D Remarki
If (M,X) is i, -connected and 2l+ 3^n, we can adopt the
above procedure to get a handle presentation of (M,X) without handles of index $ ί. 8.8. Dualisation. In this section, we discuss a sort of dualization, which is useful in getting rid of the very high dimensional handles. Let
(M,X) be a relative n-manifold (remember that we are
dealing with the special case; X amand let ^
(n-1)-submanifold of d M),
be a handle presentation of (M,X).
Consider the manifold
M"·· obtained from Μ by attaching a collar over ^ (M,X) (= ^M-X by the notation of 8.5)5 · M^ = I^M U ( δΜ - X)
[pj l} ^
identifying χ with (x,o) for x t 0 M - X. Let
M* = M+X* = [(^M-X))*. IJ Vj[c)(<^M-X) ΚΊΟ,ΐ]^ and X*^ = (0Μ-Χ) X 1.
236
We consider
as a dual of (M,X). NOW ^
handle presentation^ = (B ^
=
gives rise to a
B^) of (M^^, X*) as follows:
Ah-k-1 P(n-k)
^ere ^ ^
are the
(n-k)-handles of
· This
P(n-k) we will call the dual of.^ . The number of k-handles i n ^ is equal to the number of (n-k)-handles in Now,
so that Since
X*) =
is a collar over
ζ)
this shows that
(M,X) is
237
a dual of (M , X ) ; and vath this choice of the dual p s i r ^ is the dual of Given any handle presentation with C ^ = Β 3^*
»···'·>
then we obviously get a handle presentation
of (M,X). Even if Q ^ ^ Β
we can get a handle presentation
of (M,X) whose number of k-handles is equal to the number of (n-k)-handles of
as follows:
Let
d(M,X)xi.
(both) homogeneously.
In M^ ,
Since
\ X* and X* V X ,
is a collar over X*; by using
the theorems about cells in spheres and cells in cells, we see that C ^ is bicollared in M^. Moreover
C ^ is a neighbourhood
in M"^ . Hence by the regular neighbourhood theorem,
of X"^
C ^ is a
regular neighbourhood of X"^ in M''^ . But Β ^ is also a regular neighbourhood of X^ in M"^ . Therefore, there is an equivalence f of Μ and
fixing X"^, with Π ό M"^ =
=
Since f( 3 M"»" )
II ^M"^ = X* , f maps X* onto itself, and as
^M"^» ΧυΧ* , f has to map X onto itself. Now the desired handle presentation of (M,X) is given by =
where ^
^ ^
(since
are the
X, f(A_^) "3tof(X) = X)
(n-k)-handles of^]-^.
P(n-k) Thus
8.8,1. If there is a handle presentation of (M*, X*) without handles
238
of index;$n-A , then there is a handle presentation of (M,X) without handles of index 8.8.2. Theorems
A and Β imply Theorem C.
Since X Ti^(M)
. This gives;
Μ is a homotopy equivalence and
f^jidCMjX)),
using duality in the universal covering spaces, X) = 0, we see that X% M* is also
that is H^ (M*, X^) •tL a homotopy equivalence. of (M*, X*)
If η
then we can find a handle presentation
without handles of index ^ 6-4 = 2 by Theorem A. Hence
we can obtain handle presentation ^
of (M,X) without handles of
index ^ n-2, that is, with handles of index < n-3 only. But then, by Theorem B, as T(M,X) =
we can get from ^
a handle presen-
tation of (M,X) without any handles, that is Μ V X. Q 8.8.3. If η = 5, and
(M,X) is a h-cobordism, then there is a
handle presentation of (M,X) with only 2- and 3-handles. Q. Ex. 8.8.4. A (compact) contractibleK2-manifold is a 2-cell. Q 8.9. Algebraic Description. We have already'remarked (8.3.7) that there is a certain algebraic structure associated to a handle presentation of a relative n-manifold
(M,X).
(A
W^ suppose now that
(M,X) is a
special case, and that there are no 0- or 1-handles in Also n^3
and
fV^(M) is an isomorphism.
(A_i= ^q-
This we will
call Hypothesis 8.9.1. In this case, the maps rr^(x)-^ are all isomorphisms.
The reason
... (Γ^(Α^)—^
^^ ^ isomorphism
239
is that
iT^Cx) — >
) is an isomorphism and if, (A,) —
is a surjection. We identity all these groups and call it fT . Now, the groups C^ =
rr^
(Aj^,
are identified vath H^ (A^,
They are free modules over Ζ ίΤ
with bases correspondine to handles.OJ i-handles, the basis of C^ is denoted by
^ ^^^ ^
are the
... , ^^^^^^
and
the elements of this basis are well defined upto multiplying by elements
±rr. . If f ! Aj^ — > Aj^ is a polyhedral equivalence isotopic to the identity, it is easily seen that the algebraic structures already described for ^
and ^ ^
may be identified.
In addition, we have a map
I
vrtiich is the boundsiry map of the triple (A^, also unchanged by changing ^
to Q^^·
If there are no handles of index < k-2 and ΓΓ
(M,X) = 0, k"· 1
we see; First, n~ (A, , A „) = 0, and hence from the exact ' k-1 k-2 sequence of the triple
{k^,
A^_2) the map S ^ '
is surjective. Ihially, if there are no handles of index y k and we have
Vl
- 0,
240
Κ
to be infective.
·
Now, the boundary map ^
plus the bases of C and C k κ k— 1 determine a matrix B^^ in the usual way. That is, if
matrix-
then Bj^ is the
(k-1) ^
2,1
^^2,2
· ··
·
P(k-1)
· ·
If we choose a different orientation of coret^^^^^ , then is replaced by - ^ ^
^^
(in the basis of Cj^) so that the i^'^
row of B^ is multiplied by -1. If we extend the handle ^ ^ ^ along a path representing^ CT , then X
>
^^ is replaced by
^^^^ ^^^
multiplied by cC .
Thus, by different choices of orientations of cores and paths to the "base point", we can change Bj^ somewhat. of modification which we can do on
There is another t3φe
that is adding a row of Bj^
to another row of Bj^. This is done by using 8.6.3 as follows: Consider two k-handles ^^^^
and
> and
let 24.k ^ n-2. We now apply 8.6,3, (Remark 2), vith A^ ^ = N, = n', \
= ^^ ^^^^^ =
away from n , ··
· T^s gives a new handle
'fLi J such that
(k) with proper choices, now,represents
and
(sign prescribed), in JT ^yi
^
θ
[in
Also, we can assume ,that
is away from the attaching tubes of the other handles, so that Β = (A + K— 1
+ (other ρ-2 k-handles of ^ k-
J
)
% and
can be assumed to be identity on X. Now (B,X) has an.obvious handle presentation =
The k
B^), where = \ iik-1
boundary map of^^ , with the appropriate bases, has a matrix
which is the same as Bj^ except for i^'^ row, which is now replaced th th by the sum of the i row + (i:6)time.s the j row, corresponding to the relation X We pull
to a handle presentation
J of
ψ Κ
'
rf ' and ^J^ , the matrices of the boundary maps are the same if we choose
2 ι
the corresponding bases. And tation
can be extended to handle presen-
of (M,X) by adding the
( ^k+1 )-handles as they are.
By doing a finite number of such changes, we have 8.9.2,
(Basis Lemma), j y is a handle presentation satisfying 8.9.ij
Bj^ is the matrix of the k^'^ boundary of map of^j^^
with
with respect to bases corresponding to handles. Given any p, % P, IC matrix Ε which is the product of elementary matrices, then 3 handle presentation
iC a
of (M,X) satisfying 8.9.1
(1) the number of i-handles in 3rC is the same as the number of i-handles
> for all i> and
(2) the matrix of the
boundary map of ^
with
appropriate bases corresponding to handles is Ε · Bj^. Ql As an application of the "Basis Lemma", we will prove a proposition, usually known as the "Existence Theorem for h-cobordisms". Let Μ be a PL (n-1 )-manifold; Μ
compact, with or without boiindary.
The problem is to produce a PL n-manifold
W
containing Μ in its
boundary such that (W,M) is a h-cobordism with prescribed torsion» 8.9.3. Proposition, If the dimension of Μ is greater than 4, then given any
^ ^ Wh( HVCM)),
there exists a h-cobordism (W^M)
.with Τ (W,M) = Tq. Proofs Let A - (a^^) be a matrix
(m ><. m) representing
Consider Ν = Μ T*. I, identify Μ with ΚΊ^ 0. To
^
(N,.M) attach m ,
cancelling pairs of 2- and 3-handles and m 3-handles away from these. Let W' be the resulting manifold; and let ^ ^ be the obvious
243
handle presentation of (w',M); of the
boundary map of ^
Consider the matrix
^
satisfies 8.9.i.
Then the matrix
vdth appropriate bases is
Λ 5 this is a product of elementary matrices. I
Hence by 8.9.2, we can obtain a new handle presentation ^
, of (W ,M)
satisfying 8.9.1, such that the number of handles of each index is the same in
and ^ ' ,
and the 3^^ -boundary map of
with bases
corresponding to handles is A 0 A" Thus, if ^ ^
^ ^ ^^^ 3-handles and ^^
2-handles of
, and
^^il
^^
the
the corresponding basis
elements, then if ii. m
0 Let W be the manifold
W -
if i>m . m+1u
·.· υ ^
).
Let ^ b e the
2m
the handle presentation of (W, M) given by "^^'s and i ^ m. Then the M^W
boundary map of
is a homotopy equivalence
has the matrix
(A is non-singular).
A. Clearly Since, dually
we are attaching n-2 and n-3 handles to ^ (W,M) to get W, and n-3 ^ 3,
(W,M))—^ rr^(W) is an isomorphism.
a h-cobordism with the prescribed torsion
Q
Hence (W,M) is
Again, consider a handle presentation ^ For k^n-3,
satisfying 8.9.1.
Aj^ is, upto homotopy obtained by attaching cells of
dimension
to ^(Α^^,Χ). This shows,
ΓΓ^ Ο(Α^^,Χ))— ^
is an isomorphism for k ^ n-3; and hence
"
CK^t X)·
We are interested in the following question ; Suppose a k-sphere ^ 'Sc
represents in
element ^^corresponding to a particular k-handle.
Then, is there a map f i ^
^
of
f I a hemisphere of ^
in
such that
onto a core of
is an embedding
?
We note that =•
(Α^,Χ) homotopic to the inclusion
b
- (transverse tubes of k-handles) ,X) - (attaching tubes of k-handles)
and so
b (Α^^,Χ) fV ^ (A^^
vdll have fundamental group ίΤ if
either (n-k-1) ^(n-1) - 3 or (k-1 > ^ (n-1) - 3, so that k^(n-3) is sufficient.
This implies
245
Consider the follovang diagram:
I
1.2
I (T
^(S·,,?) Λ ^ ( ν , Γ χ ) ) - i a ^ n ; ( V
k
λ,
\
V,)
ίχν,.χ)) Here h^, h^ are hurewicz maps,
(V V.' · i^, ig,
are induced
by inclusion maps, riC^ and oC ^ are the maps induces by Μ — > Μ. , All the induces occuring are be isomorphisms,
«C ^ and eC ^ are well knovm to
h^ and h2 are isomorphisms since the pairs are
(k-1)-connected. By excision, i^ is an isomorphism. and and
I^
are SLISO isomorphisms.
Hence x^
Therefore, a boundary core of
^
represent the same element in Thus the answer to our question is Yes:
a. 9.4. L e t ^ be a handle presentation satisfying the hypothesis 8.9.1 Let k be an integer 4 n-3 is an isomorphism,
k^n-1_7.
k.^ 3, Then two geometric objects, representing
the same element of fTj^ (A^, of f^ki^^V^^'
also represent the same element . In particular, if -^iC^^
is a k-sphere, representing the element ^^in
(A^j
2
it represents the element
in \\
ό(Α^,Χ),
This means that there is a homotopy in of ^
"^(Λ^^,Χ) from the identity map
to a map taking the upper hemisphere of
onto a (boundary) core of
^ (A^
in a
1-1 way
, and taking the lower hemisphere of
into.
in particular the end result of X. will
not intersect any other handles. D If ^
is the attaching' sphere of a (k+1)-handle ^
^U^l) "
and
above situation. We would like to
get a aiiitable isotopy from the above homotopy information, to cancel the handles corresponding ^
and
in
This is provided
by the following lemma. Sinde the proof of this lemma is rather long and seems to be of some general interest, we will postpone the proof to the last section. 8.9.5» η
(Isotopy Lemma). With the hypotheses of Β.9Λ, if in addition, and k ^ n-4, then there is an isotopy in
to another k-sphere sphere of
^ ', such that
^(A^^jX) carrying 5*
^ ' intersects a transverse
in one point transversally and does not intersect the
other k-handles.
Ο
β.10. Proofs of Theorems
A and B.
In this section, we will prove Theorems
A and Β assuming the Isotopy
Lemma, which will be. proved in the next section. First let us see what are tht types of manifolds and presentations that we have to consider. 3.7.
So, we can assume
and n^6, by hypothesis.
Theorem A, for i. ^ 1 is proved in
and hence η >^6.
For Theorem B, Ji = η
So again using 8.7, it is enough to consider
handle presentations satisfying 8.9.1, and in addition
n^6.
We start with two observations concerning the matrices of the boundary maps: 8. 10. 1. Let ^ ^ be handle presentation satisfying 8.9.1, be the... i-handles of^E • Let B^^^ =
rl ^
matrix of
boundary map ^ ^^^ with respect to preferred bases. That is,
[tf]^^
cCij J=1 . Suppose
'(k) iW ^
oU+W and f^^ f^^ and
a handle pre sent at ion
can be cancelled.
-
ciijU(tr).
Then we have formed
=
say , of
(M,X) as follows: B. = 1
f (A. )
for :
Λ
\= A. 1 Here
1
for i>k, ^k+1) A^ +
f is an equivalence
onto itself.
(k+1)
If the attaching tube of % ^ " 1
mapping X does not intersect
any other k-handle except ^ , f can be assiimed to be identity /(k) on all , We assume that this is the case. Now ^(k) ^ /(k) ^(k+1) ,····,ρ are all the k-handles and TL^ »····, ^^ are all the
(k+1 )-handles of-3^-
abuse of notation^
_
, is a basis of
Thus (by. (B^,
^)
is a basis of ΓΓ (B , Β ). Let k+1 k+1 k ^
k+1
denote the
boundary map o f ~
Consider the following commutative diagram rf
(A , A k+1 k+r k
(A ) k k
^ ^^^^ ' 1
^ 1
(A = B ,Ar^B,A ^B k+1 k+1 k^ k k-^- k
J \ (T (A , A ) " k k k-1
In this diagram, the vertical maps are induced by inclusion, the horizontal: maps are canonical maps, and Now
and
/rp
Ν
i
Hence, for i>,2,
^
) - o>
= ^
,j
k+1
/ Pk
r#(k)
ς :
'
i=2 Thus, if the matrix of ^ ^^^ is
j^j),
is
then the matrix of ^ ^^^
j >^2, This we have as long as the attaching tube
/(k+l) [1 TL 1i keeps away from the transverse tubes of the handles '(k) i>,2. (It is easy to see ci oC, ^ = 1 1,2 '> pk
that
this case). It does not matter even if the attaching tubes of other (k+1)-handles intersect the transverse tube of 8.10.2. If f : A • k
| \
Ό.
A is an equivalence isotoDxc to the identity k
£ leaving X fixed, then in corresponding Since the
and
, the attaching spheres of the
(k+1)-handles represent the same elements in ^^ , (A ). ^ Κ boundary maps are factored through (V (A ), the κ k
corresponding matrices are the same after the choice of obvious bases in ^ a n d ^ ^ and hence in ^ and ^ ^ 1 ^. Q Proof of Theorem A. Step 1; Let^^= A^) be a handle presentation of satisfying 8.9.1. ^^e are given that we know that the sequence
(M,X) is ^-connected, th«
j.^
250
'V,' ν
ΓΓι^ν ν.' ^
···
°
is exact. Suppose that we have already eliminated upto handles of index" (i-l), that is inj^ > (*), TT^^, the matrix
= ^q " " " fTi
^P^+^^Pj^^
^^
i®
^ i+1 ^^^ bases corresponding to handles.
Then, there exists a (p +p)y.(p "^p) matrix E, which is i+1 i i+1 i the product of elementaiy matrices, such that Ε X
s
-χ
Ί Pi
0
If we attach p^ cancelling pairs of (i+l), (i+2)-handles away from the handles of index ^ (i+2) to the i^'^ level o f ^ , then in the resulting handle presentation of
·
,..., B^) of (M,X), the matrix \
appropriate bases is
Then, by the Basis Lemma, we can obtain a handle presentation of (M,X) satisfying 8.9.1, with exactly the same number of handles of each index >st as above, but (i+l; boundary matrix will now be
251
Ex
"l Pi 0 Pi.i'Pi
This means that starting from ^ ^ , presentation
»···> ^^^
(0
we can obtain a handle such
that
satisfies 8.9.1, >nd there are no handles of indices ^ i - 1
(2) the (i+O®^ bomdary map of
matrix
Now we can eliminate the i~handles one at a time as follows: Step 2! Consider ^ ^ ^ ^ and i^n-4. of δ
and
^ _ ^^
=
Hence by the Isotopy Lemma, there is an equivalence f such that
f takes an attaching sphere S^
to another ..i-sphere sj and
of ^ ^
^
S| intersects a transverse sphere of
κ(i)
at one point transversally. Moreover it can be assumed that f (i+o ρ (i+1) (attaching tube of ^ ^ ) does not intersect the transverse tubes of the other i-handles. f can be extended to an equivalence
f of
C. taking X onto itself and in the handles corresponding ^^^ and can be nearly cancelled. By 8. 5.7, there is an equivalenc f g (e;f) g of C^, so that in (IK ) = I X " , the handles corresponding and
can be cancelled. /(i-^Ox
(attaching tube of of the handles ^^^^ ,
Again, we can require that g*f
] sho\ild not intersect the transverse tubes Consider
This is a handle
{ CWAA ^ Crm be
252
•to V^e. iic-bfic Vo VW. lA-en-HV^ i(i) 0 (i-1) the handles Tt and .-X ''I ^(i+0 and fl,^ can be cancelled. By
presentation of (M,X), and in ^ say, corresponding to XioTlTthe
(i+1)®^ boundary map
Hence, we can go on repeating step 2 ^iPi-1) 0 to obtain a handle presentation of (M,X) vdthout handles upto index i. has the matrix
0'
Thus, inductively, the first part of Theorem A is proved. The second part is clear.
Q
Proof of Theorem B: By Theorem A, we can assume that there is a handle presentation
with handles of indices (n-3) and (n~4)
OT^y. ^ ^ obviously satisfies 8.9.1. Consider the map
δ Here Ah. . = -1
n-3 ' ' n-3 k . Let n-5
A^ n-3' n-U
rr^^
A be the matrix of η ^ with respect n-3
to bases corresponding to handles. A is a nonsingular matrix, say mKm
matrix.
Since
(M,X) = 0, A represents the 0-element in
Wh(iT ). Hence for some q^m
there exists an (m+q) >!^(ffl-Kj) matrix
Ε which is the product of elementaiy matrices, such that A 0 = I 0 I m+q qj Now we add q cancelling pairs of (n-3)- and (n-4)-handles to A^ ^ away from: the other handles, so that in the new handle presentation, say^]^,
of (M,X), the
the matrix ~A 0 η
(n-3)^'^ boundary map of ^ ^ has
253
Then by the Basis Lemma, we can obtain a new handle presentation of (M,X) with exactly (m+q) handles of indices and no others, and such that the matrix of the of
(n-3) and (n-4)
(n-3)^^ boundary map
with respect to bases corresponding to handles is Ij^+q·
by a repeated application of Step 2 in the proof of Theorem Ay all the handles can be eliminated .so that Μ V^·
^
8.11. Proof of the Isotopy Lemma. Vie begin with some elementary lemmas. 8.11.1. Lemma. Let
Q.C ^ ^ Q ^ be polyhedra, where is OKvdl ί Ρ >. GL ptS^Kiu
k-cell and
Q f\ f ' (YWiflC) = 0 contains an open and dense subset of ^ . Proof; Let Q' = f(Q)'n (Y X Δ). projection of Q' to ^
Then dim q'^ dim Q <.k . The
does not cover most of the points of
k-dimensional Δ . Any point «C not belonging to the projection of q' to Δ
will satisfy Q Π f V y X c C ) = 0,
Q
8.11 2. Lemma. If dim Q = k in the above, then the set of points eiC (- Δ such that QHf" (YXiC) is 0-dimensional contains an open and dense subset of fik . Proof; Triangulate the projection of q' to ix. .3f c^ simplicial presentation of ^
with respect to which this map is
simplicial, then every point esC Qi Δ property by 4.2. Let
is the
^^^
Ο f :Ρ
^ X be a nondegenerate map, simplicial with
respect to the presentations ^ , ^ the closure of the set S(f)
of P, X. Let "^(f) denote
t-P 3 yfcP,y
x, f(y) ^ f(x)^(see
254
5.4). ^
(f) is covered by a subpresentation of φ , call it ^
8.11.3. If C i s a principal simplex of J] , then
.
f
is an embedding. Proof! Since
f is nondegenerate it maps Lk(6~,(p) into
and on \ StCS^lP)^ it is the join of
—>
f 5"
and
jLk(r,(p)(—>(Lk(fr,%)^ The map \ an embedding; othervase if f r·^ = f
then
/^
(Lk(fe,A.)l is
, 'X , Τ η ί Lk(r'jp) and
f( Γ T^) = f(r· ^ 2 )
so that
^^ ,
contrary to the assumption- that. ^ is a principal simplex of ^
St(5',(p)) —> |st(f(r
Hence the map
embeddings is an embedding.
.
being the join of
Q
Proof of the Isotopy Lemma for k ^ n-5! The situation is: We have a handle presentation^^ of a relative n-manifold a special case, and
satisfies the hypothesis 8.9.1. We have
k-sphere 3 (what was called Σ representing
(M,X) which is
in 8.9.4 and 8.9.5) in
in
where
d (Α^^,Χ)
is a k-handle. We
deduced in 8.9.4 that in this case if k $ n-3 there is a homotopy ^ { 3)ς I —
t
h
a
t
h^ = embedding
S C0iA^v>)and h'^
(transverse tubes of all k-handles) is a k-cell C which is mapped by h^ isomorphically onto a core of
h,(s - c ) c ^ ( v x)n
, so that
X)·
In the iSotopy Lemma, we have further assumed that k ^ n-4. We first prove the simpler case when k dimension of ^ in δ (Aj^jX) "is ^4.
n-5i that is when the co-
255
We can by general position suppose
(h) has dimension
^ 2 (k+1) - (n-l) = 2 k+3 - n. Now ^
is polyhedrally equivalent to D^
the transverse tube of any point JC k ii^t
corresponding to D
vdth
^
^o^
et X 0 Al is a transverse sphere; and any such
transverse sphere will intersect the core h^(G) transversally in exactly one point, since h^(C) corresponds to D
We try to apply Lemma 8.11.1 Q= "Shadow"
^ , for some
to this situation. Define
I. (h) = ^Projg r ( h ) } * I
Ρ = SΚ I Ρ— ^ S^ I —
X 3 Y y^ct becomes D
transverse tube of
^
The crucial hypothesis now is dim Q < k. Since, in general dim (projg ^ (h)) ^ dim Zl(h), we have dim Q $ dim X(h)+1 ^2k+4-n. To have this < k is exactly where we need k ^ '>-5. The conclusion then is: dC Κ ^ Δ X
b Δ »
There exists a transverse sphere Τ of
of the form
some dC tint D, so that h'^T) does not intersect
the shadow of the singularities X(,h) or, what amounts to the same, the "shadow" of h~\T), namely Ζ = _ [projg h'UT)]K I C does not intersect 51(h).
S X. I
Hence there is some regular neighbourhood
Ν of Ζ in 3 Λ Ι , with Ν Γ> 21(h) = 0. This implies, since Ko is an embedding, that h| S)<0\JN
is an embedding.
256
We clearly have Ν V NfiSy^O, and these are (k+1)- and k-manifolds,
N^S^CoC^N.
Thus h ( S ^ O ) = S
and h
- (ΝΓ\3)<.0) + L
+ ( ^N manifold
= S' differ in
cellular moves along the
h(N). Therefore (by 7.1.8) there is an isotopy of5(Aj^, X)
taking S onto s'. By conatniction all of h~'(T) is in N, and S' contains only h ( dN - Si^O) in h(N), and this will intersect Τ at h (h-^T) Π 3>ζΐ), that is at point (corresponding to «^^fi ) transversally. /
By being only a bit more careful, considering the transverse tubes of other k-handles, we can arrange for s' not to intersect the other k-handles at all (if k-handle other than ^ isotopy of
τ' is a transverse sphere^aome
, then h~^(T')nSM = 0, and there is an
X) carrying ^
X) - small reg\ilar neighbourhoods
of prescribed transverse sphere of the other k-handles to transverse tubes of the other k-handles). Remark; This already gives Theorem C for The case
k - n-k.
In case k = n-4, η
the above result is still true,
but this involves some delicate points. Since η w e
have
(for k = n-4) the crucial number
2k + 3 - n>0. We consider, as before h : SXI — >
^^
general position, so that dim X (h) < 2k + 3 - n. Remembering S = h(S)*,0), we further use general position so that
h~ Vs)f\ S X.(0,2J
is of dimension ^ k + (k+l) - (n-l) = 2k + 2 - n, and call
257
0(h) = closure Make
(0,3 ).
h simplicial, say vrLth reference to /{of
and refine/^ to /4 θ '
S
so that
0(h) is covered by a subpresentation
^y ^ subpresentation
is simplicial on
1,
> and the projection
S lU: — ^ S
'.
Now we have to pick our transverse sphere Τ =
xbA'^
In the transverse tube D^ X 'δ D""^ so that (1) h"\T) Ο
shadow X (h) is O-dimensional
(2) h-\T) a H i h ) - φ (3) h'^T) Π On S X O U
shadow
^ (2k + 2-n)-skeleton of Σ*^» 0
a neighbo\irhood of
[shadow h~ (T)"^
h
is a local embedding, using Lemma 8.11.3. Let Q = shadow h'^T).
The finite set of points
Q r\ X(h) does not intersect any point of h~^(T). Each point say X 6: Q rv^(h) belongs to a (2k + 3 - n)-simplex of ^ ^ say Since
has dimension
we can move
hood of X by a polyhedral equivalence move
SXI
f !S
in a tiny neighboup—^
3>-Ι
so as to
X around on C"^, that is, so that f(Q)nX(h) = Q n X ( h ) - I x ] +
,
where the choice of x' ranges over an infinite set. f will not move
h"^!) nor will it move
3^0 . There are only a finitely
many points to worry about, and so we can find a polyhedral equivalence f : SXvI— ^ of points points.
SXI,
leaving
h'^T) Vj SX>0 fixed, such that the set
f(Q) r\X(h) are mapped by h into pairwise distinct
258
At this moment, we see that on S)i.O VJ fCQ), h is an embedding.
Since h is a local embedding on some neighbourhood of
f(Q) (we restrict
f close to the identity so that
f(Q)C S X.I -
+ 2 - n)-skeleton of ^
, and an embedding on
f(Q); hence it is an embedding on some neighbourhood of f(Q). Q(h) is well out of the way, and so h actually embeds all of Sy^O U (a neighbourhood of f(Q)). We now proceed as before, usine f(Q) to move around along. This trick looks a bit different from piping, which is what we would have to do in the case η = 5, k = 1; this was the case when we had a null homotopic
vyf: 22/9/'67
1-sphere C
4-manifold unknotted.